JP6477635B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  Related to gaming machines.

  Conventionally, gaming machines have been provided with various effect devices for informing the player of the progress of the game. In particular, various light-emitting members such as liquid crystal display devices and lamps are mainly used as visual effects devices. Liquid crystal display devices have become thinner and lighter than before, but in recent years, devices with a wide display area have been adopted to enhance the effect of production, and have occupied a considerable area of gaming machines. ing.

  In addition, in order to make the lamp stand out as much as possible, it is necessary to secure a suitable power supply in order to use a lamp with high emission brightness or increase the number, which is also a considerable area of gaming machines Accounted for.

  From this point of view, there is a demand for a presentation device that can enhance the production effect while being downsized, and that can be used in place of a liquid crystal display device or a lamp, or that can be used with a liquid crystal display device or a lamp. It was rare.

JP-A-2015-204907 JP 2012-254339 A JP 2006-93713 A

  However, in recent years, there has been a demand for a gaming machine having a rendering device that has translucency and has a further enhanced rendering effect that can be freely deformed in shape.

  In addition, the new rendering device as described above speeds up various processes including display processing, and it is assumed that electromagnetic waves such as high-frequency noise are emitted to the surroundings as the speed increases. Even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from such a production device, it is necessary to prevent various control devices of the gaming machine from malfunctioning.

The gaming machine according to this aspect is
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a transmission effect display device TSG);
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls information display on the information display unit (for example, the transmission effect display device TSG),
The information display unit (for example, the transmission effect display device TSG)
A first conductive layer (for example, first conductive layer 1120) and a second conductive layer (for example, second conductive layer) disposed opposite to the first conductive layer (for example, first conductive layer 1120). Conductive layer 2120), the first conductive layer (for example, first conductive layer 1120) and the second conductive layer (for example, second conductive layer 2120), and the first conductive layer. (Eg, the first conductive layer 1120) and the first electrode (eg, the first electrode 1012) in electrical contact with the second conductive layer (eg, the second conductive layer 2120) A first light-emitting element (eg, first light-emitting element 1010) having a second electrode in contact (eg, second electrode 1014) ;
A third conductive layer (for example, third conductive layer 2130) disposed on the opposite side of a base (for example, second base 2110) on which the second conductive layer is disposed; and the third conductive layer Between the fourth conductive layer (for example, the fourth conductive layer 3120), the third conductive layer, and the fourth conductive layer. A second light emitting element having a third electrode (for example, the first electrode 1022) in contact with the fourth electrode and a fourth electrode (for example, the second electrode 1024) in electrical contact with the fourth conductive layer. for example, a second light emitting element 1020) and <br/> least,
At least a part of the information display unit (for example, the transmission effect display device TSG) has flexibility,
At least a part of the information display unit (for example, the transmission effect display device TSG) has translucency,
The information display unit (for example, the transmission effect display device TSG) is formed in a sheet shape,
Suppression of suppressing arrival of electromagnetic waves emitted from the information display unit (for example, the transmission effect display device TSG) to the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) or the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) Mechanism (for example, electromagnetic wave suppressing member DY)
It is comprised so that it may further be provided.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a rendering device that is translucent and can be viewed three-dimensionally including members and the like that are disposed rearward and that can be freely deformed and disposed. By providing, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the effect.

FIG. 1A is a front view showing an appearance of a light emitting member applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a schematic view showing one light emitting region among a plurality of light emitting regions constituting the light emitting member. ). FIG. 2 is a perspective view schematically showing a configuration of a light emitting member applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the light emitting member along the line AA shown in FIG. 1B of the light emitting member applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4A is a front view showing a circuit pattern formed on the first conductive layer of the light emitting member applicable to the gaming machine according to this embodiment, and FIG. 4 shows the circuit pattern formed on the third conductive layer. It is a front view (B) shown. FIG. 5 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the movable body accessory drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the transparent right-handed instruction display control process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is an image of a movable body effect transmission effect in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a transparent character effect image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from this embodiment. FIG. 28 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 31 is an image diagram of the transmission pseudo-continuous variation effect in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 32 is an image 2 of the movable body effect transmission effect in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 34 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of prefetch effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a transparency hold display effect image in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a transparent right-handed instruction display image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 42 is a permeable drum effect image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of a rotating game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 44 is a perspective view of a state in which the door of the swivel type gaming machine according to the third embodiment is opened. FIG. 45 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal slot in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 46 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 47 is a list of basic specifications in the rotary gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 48 is a list of reel arrangements in the rotary type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 49 is a symbol combination list 1 in the rotating game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 50 is a symbol combination list 2 in the rotating game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 51 is a symbol combination list 3 in the rotating game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a symbol combination list 4 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 53 is a list of condition devices 1 in the rotating game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is a list of condition devices 2 in the rotating game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a list of condition devices 3 in the rotating game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a list of condition devices 4 in the rotary gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a list of condition devices 5 in the rotary gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a list of small role appearance rates in the rotary type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of a spinning cylinder gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of a setting change device control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (fourth sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flow chart of lever AT lottery execution control processing on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of condition device number management processing on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 69 is an effect group number list in the rotary type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the execution process for adding the number of A games at the time of the lever on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the stop-time AT lottery execution control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the process for adding the number of winning games on the main control board side in the rotary gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 75 is an RT state transition diagram 1 in the rotating game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 77 is an AT state transition diagram 1 in the rotating game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of power-off processing on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 80 is a push order display image diagram in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 81 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of effect operation content determination processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the rendering operation control process on the sub control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 84 is a reel window permeability effect image diagram on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 85 is a medium panel transparency effect image diagram on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (fourth sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the rendering operation control process on the sub control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the AT state transition permeability effect execution control process on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a mid-panel transparency effect image diagram 2 on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an image of the upper panel transparency effect on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present example. FIG. 92 is a lower panel transparency effect image diagram on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 93 suppresses electromagnetic waves by an electromagnetic wave suppressing member DY (conductive case, conductive plate, conductive film, etc.) for suppressing electromagnetic waves, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG. It is the schematic which shows the state which does not malfunction various control boards. In FIG. 94, even when the transmission effect display device TSG is disposed at a position away from various control boards and electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, various controls are performed by the attenuation of the electromagnetic waves. Schematic diagram (A) showing a state in which a substrate or the like does not malfunction, and a state in which the transmission effect display device TSG is disposed at a position close to various control substrates and various control substrates or the like malfunction without attenuation of electromagnetic waves. It is a schematic diagram (B). FIG. 95 is a list 1 of electromagnetic wave effect prevention mode examples showing examples of (A) transmissive effect display device installation site in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 96 is an electromagnetic wave effect prevention mode example list 2 showing (B) electromagnetic wave shielding device examples and (C) devices that need to shield electromagnetic waves in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 97 is an electromagnetic wave effect prevention mode example list 3 showing an example of a part where (A) the transmissive effect display device is installed in the swivel type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 98 is an electromagnetic wave effect prevention mode example list 4 showing (B) an example of an electromagnetic wave shielding device and (C) an apparatus that needs to shield an electromagnetic wave in the swivel type gaming machine according to the present example.

Form to carry out

  Below, the case where the transparency production | presentation display apparatus TSG is applied to a pachinko game machine and a swing type game machine is demonstrated. As will be described later, the transmission effect display device TSG includes a light emitting member 1000 that functions as a light source and a display device, emits multicolored light as the light source, and various information such as characters, figures, and symbols as the display device. Can be displayed in multiple colors. Various effects can be executed by using the transmissive effect display device TSG in pachinko gaming machines and swing-type gaming machines. The structure of the transmission effect display device TSG according to the present example, the outline of the use of the transmission effect display device TSG according to the present example, the pachinko gaming machine of the transmission effect display device TSG according to the present example, and the revolving type gaming machine Detailed description will be given in the order of a specific mode of application and a mode of suppressing electromagnetic waves.

<< Transparency effect display device >>
The transmissive effect display device TSG according to this example includes a light emitting member 1000 for displaying the effect, a drive circuit, and a connection cable. Hereinafter, the specific configuration of the transmissive effect display device will be described in detail, but the configuration of the transmissive effect display device TSG according to this example is as long as it has the same effect in pachinko gaming machines and revolving game machines. It is not limited to the configuration of

<Light emitting member 1000>
FIG. 1A is a front view showing the appearance of the light emitting member 1000. FIG. 1B is a schematic view showing one light emitting region 100 among a plurality of light emitting regions 100 constituting the light emitting member 1000.

  The light emitting member 1000 has a thin plate shape (sheet shape, film shape), and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The thickness of the light emitting member 1000 is approximately 0.5 mm, for example. The length of the light emitting member 1000 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction can be appropriately determined according to the mode to be used. Note that the light emitting member 1000 is made of a transparent material whose rear side is visible over substantially the entire light emitting member 1000 including the light emitting region 100 described later.

  The light emitting member 1000 can be used by being attached to an object such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate. Further, as will be described later, each member constituting the light-emitting member 1000 has flexibility (flexibility), and the light-emitting member 1000 has flexibility (flexibility). It can be bent or bent according to the shape. For example, the light emitting member 1000 can be deformed according to the outer shape or outline of the object and adhered to the surface of the object. In this case, the horizontal and vertical lengths of the light emitting member 1000 can be determined according to the size of the object. Specific usage examples will be described later.

  Furthermore, the shape of the light emitting member 1000 itself can be determined as appropriate in accordance with not only the substantially rectangular shape but also the outer shape and contour of the object. Furthermore, the light emitting member 1000 can be cut and used in accordance with the outer shape or outline of the object.

<Light emitting area 100>
The light emitting member 1000 has a plurality of light emitting regions 100. As shown in FIG. 1A, the light emitting region 100 is disposed along the horizontal direction and the vertical direction of the light emitting member 1000. That is, the plurality of light emitting regions 100 are arranged in a matrix shape or a lattice shape on the light emitting member 1000. One light emitting region 100 constitutes one pixel (pixel). In addition to such an arrangement, the light emitting region 100 can be arranged in a direction different from the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, for example, along an oblique direction, or along a predetermined curve. . It is sufficient that desired information (image) can be displayed on the light emitting member 1000 by the light emission of the plurality of light emitting regions 100. The quality of the image displayed on the light emitting member 1000 is determined by the number of pixels (resolution) according to the interval between the adjacent light emitting regions 100, and is mainly displayed as an image similar to a so-called dot image. Further, the light emitting member 1000 can be used as a light source by emitting light from the plurality of light emitting regions 100.

  As shown in FIG. 1B, each of the light emitting regions 100 includes three light emitting elements, a first light emitting element 1010, a second light emitting element 1020, and a third light emitting element 1030. For example, the light emitting element can be a light emitting diode element (LED) or the like. The light-emitting element is not a chip used as a so-called mounting component, but is a member that emits light. By doing in this way, it can make it difficult to visually recognize the light emitting element arrange | positioned at the light emitting member 1000. FIG. One set of the first light emitting element 1010, the second light emitting element 1020, and the third light emitting element 1030 forms one light emitting region 100 to form one pixel.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 1B, each of the first light-emitting element 1010, the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third light-emitting element 1030 is disposed so as to be positioned at the apex of an equilateral triangle when viewed from the front. By arranging in this way, the first light emitting element 1010, the second light emitting element 1020, and the third light emitting element 1030 adjacent to each other can be arranged to be separated by the same distance. Note that the arrangement of the first light-emitting element 1010, the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third light-emitting element 1030 is not limited to this, and may be determined according to desired information. For example, the first light-emitting element 1010, the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third light-emitting element 1030 can be arranged linearly.

  The first light emitting element 1010 is a red LED element, the second light emitting element 1020 is a green LED element, and the third light emitting element 1030 is a blue LED element. The light emitting region 100 can emit light in multiple colors over the entire light emitting member 1000, and various desired information such as characters, figures, symbols, and other patterns can be emitted in multiple colors. It can be displayed on the member 1000. Details of the structures of the first light-emitting element 1010, the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third light-emitting element 1030 will be described later.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 1A, the example in which the plurality of light emitting regions 100 are uniformly formed on the entire light emitting member 1000 is shown, but the light emitting member 1000 may be formed only on a part of the light emitting member 1000. For example, the plurality of light emitting regions 100 can be formed only in the peripheral region of the light emitting member 1000, only in the four corner regions of the light emitting member 1000, or only in the central region of the light emitting member 1000. Furthermore, you may form the several light emission area | region 100 so that a predetermined figure may be drawn within the surface where the light emitting member 1000 extends. Moreover, you may form so that the density of arrangement | positioning of the several light emission area | region 100 may differ. For example, the light emitting regions 100 may be formed so as to be densely arranged in a certain region and sparsely arranged in the remaining region.

<Configuration of Light-Emitting Member 1000>
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an outline of the configuration of the light emitting member 1000. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the light emitting member 1000. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a configuration of the light emitting member 1000 along the line AA illustrated in FIG.

  The light-emitting member 1000 includes a first support 1100, a second support 2100, and a third support 3100, a first intermediate layer 1200 and a second intermediate layer 1300, and the first light-emitting element 1010 described above. , A second light emitting element 1020 and a third light emitting element 1030. As shown in FIG. 2, the first support body 1100, the second support body 2100, and the third support body 3100 are arranged so as to overlap with each other to form a light emitting member 1000.

<First Support 1100, Second Support 2100, and Third Support 3100>
Each of the first support 1100, the second support 2100, and the third support 3100 has a thin plate shape (sheet shape), is substantially the same size, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. Have

<First support 1100>
The first support 1100 includes a first base 1110 and a first conductive layer 1120. The first base 1110 has a thin plate shape. The first conductive layer 1120 is formed on one surface of the first base 1110.

<Second support 2100>
The second support 2100 includes a second base 2110, a second conductive layer 2120, and a third conductive layer 2130. The second base 2110 has a thin plate shape. The second conductive layer 2120 is formed on one surface of the second base 2110, and the third conductive layer 2130 is formed on the other surface of the second base 2110.

<Third support 3100>
The third support 3100 includes a third base 3110 and a fourth conductive layer 3120. The third base 3110 has a thin plate shape. The fourth conductive layer 3120 is formed on one surface of the third base 3110.

  Each of the first support 1100, the second support 2100, and the third support 3100 has flexibility (flexibility) and translucency.

<First Base 1110, Second Base 2110, and Third Base 3110>
The first substrate 1110, the second substrate 2110, and the third substrate 3110 can be formed of, for example, polyethylene terephthalate (PET) polycarbonate (PC), acrylic resin, or the like.

  The total light transmittance (JIS K7105) of the first substrate 1110, the second substrate 2110, and the third substrate 3110 is preferably 90% or more, and more preferably 95% or more. In addition, each of the first substrate 1110, the second substrate 2110, and the third substrate 3110 has a thickness of 50 to 300 μm, for example. If the thickness of the first substrate 1110, the second substrate 2110, and the third substrate 3110 is too thick, there is a possibility that the flexibility may be lowered or the light transmission property may be lowered.

<First Conductive Layer 1120, Second Conductive Layer 2120, Third Conductive Layer 2130, and Fourth Conductive Layer 3120>
The first conductive layer 1120, the second conductive layer 2120, the third conductive layer 2130, and the fourth conductive layer 3120 include, for example, indium tin oxide (ITO), fluorine-doped tin oxide (FTO), and indium zinc oxide ( It can be formed of a transparent conductive material such as IZO). Further, the first conductive layer 1120, the second conductive layer 2120, the third conductive layer 2130, and the fourth conductive layer 3120 may be formed using carbon nanotube (CNT) ink. By forming with carbon nanotube ink, the bending resistance and durability can be enhanced, and the conductivity can be easily maintained even when bent.

  The first conductive layer 1120, the second conductive layer 2120, the third conductive layer 2130, and the fourth conductive layer 3120 are thin films made of the above-described transparent conductive material by, for example, sputtering or electron beam evaporation. A conductive circuit layer in which a desired circuit pattern is formed by patterning the thin film obtained by laser processing, etching, or the like (see FIG. 4).

  Further, the first conductive layer 1120, the second conductive layer 2120, the third conductive layer 2130, and the fourth conductive layer 3120 are fine particles of a transparent conductive material (for example, fine particles having an average particle size in the range of 10 to 100 nm). ) And a transparent resin binder may be applied in a circuit shape by screen printing or the like, or a coating pattern of this mixture may be subjected to patterning by laser processing or photolithography to form a circuit pattern.

  The first conductive layer 1120, the second conductive layer 2120, the third conductive layer 2130, and the fourth conductive layer 3120 are a first support 1100, a second support 2100, and a third support 3100. It is preferable that the total light transmittance (JIS K7105) has a light-transmitting property of 50% or more and the light-emitting member 1000 has a light-transmitting property of which the total light transmittance as a whole is 30% or more. . When the total light transmittance of the entire light emitting member 1000 is less than 30%, the light emitting point is not visually recognized as a bright point. As for the translucency of the first conductive layer 1120, the second conductive layer 2120, the third conductive layer 2130, and the fourth conductive layer 3120 itself, the total light transmittance is preferably in the range of 50 to 85%. . If the total light transmittance of each of the first conductive layer 1120, the second conductive layer 2120, the third conductive layer 2130, and the fourth conductive layer 3120 exceeds 85%, the wiring pattern can be easily visually confirmed. As a result, the light emitting member 1000 may be inconvenient.

<First Light-Emitting Element 1010, Second Light-Emitting Element 1020, and Third Light-Emitting Element 1030>
As described above, the three light emitting elements of the first light emitting element 1010, the second light emitting element 1020, and the third light emitting element 1030 can be light emitting diodes (LEDs), for example. As the light emitting diode, a diode element having a PN junction (hereinafter referred to as an LED element) can be used. The light emitting diode may be a laser diode (LD) element or the like.

  Examples of LED elements include those in which a P-type semiconductor layer is formed on an N-type semiconductor substrate, those in which an N-type semiconductor layer is formed on a P-type semiconductor substrate, and an N-type semiconductor layer and a P-type semiconductor on the semiconductor substrate. Layer, a P type hetero semiconductor layer and an N type hetero semiconductor layer formed on a P type semiconductor substrate, an N type hetero semiconductor layer and a P type hetero semiconductor layer formed on an N type semiconductor substrate Can be used. Here, the “substrate” generally refers to a board in which circuit elements are built or printed wirings are formed for an integrated circuit or the like. For example, there are a printed circuit board and a silicon single crystal plate.

<First electrode 1012 and second electrode 1014>
As shown in FIG. 3, the first light emitting element 1010 includes a side portion 1017, and a first end surface 1016 and a second end surface 1018 formed with the side portion 1017 interposed therebetween. A first electrode 1012 smaller than the area of the first end surface 1016 is provided on the first end surface 1016, and a second electrode 1014 is provided on the second end surface 1018. The first electrode 1012 has an area smaller than the first end surface 1016 which is a light emitting surface so that light emission to the outside is not hindered.

  The first electrode 1012 of the first light-emitting element 1010 is electrically connected by being in direct contact with the first conductive layer 1120, and the second electrode 1014 is in direct contact with the second conductive layer 2120. To be electrically connected.

<First electrode 1022 and second electrode 1024>
As illustrated in FIG. 3, the second light emitting element 1020 includes a side portion 1027, and a first end surface 1026 and a second end surface 1028 that are formed with the side portion 1027 interposed therebetween. The first end face 1026 is provided with a first electrode 1022 smaller than the area of the first end face 1026, and the second end face 1028 is provided with a second electrode 1024. The first electrode 1022 has an area smaller than the first end surface 1026 that is a light emitting surface so that light emission to the outside is not hindered.

  The first electrode 1022 of the second light-emitting element 1020 is electrically connected by being in direct contact with the third conductive layer 2130, and the second electrode 1024 is in direct contact with the fourth conductive layer 3120. To be electrically connected.

<First electrode 1032 and second electrode 1034>
As illustrated in FIG. 3, the third light emitting element 1030 includes a side portion 1037, and a first end surface 1036 and a second end surface 1038 that are formed with the side portion 1037 interposed therebetween. The first end surface 1036 is provided with a first electrode 1032 smaller than the area of the first end surface 1036, and the second end surface 1038 is provided with a second electrode 1034. The first electrode 1032 has a smaller area than the first end surface 1036 which is a light emitting surface so that light emission to the outside is not hindered.

  The first electrode 1032 of the third light-emitting element 1030 is electrically connected by being in direct contact with the third conductive layer 2130, and the second electrode 1034 is in direct contact with the fourth conductive layer 3120. To be electrically connected.

  The first electrodes 1012, 1022, and 1032 and the second electrodes 1014, 1024, and 1034 are made of, for example, gold.

  The first support body 1100 and the second support body 2100 are arranged so that the first conductive layer 1120 and the second conductive layer 2120 face each other. A first light emitting element 1010 is disposed between the first support 1100 and the second support 2100 facing each other. As described above, the first electrode 1012 of the first light-emitting element 1010 is in direct contact with and electrically connected to the first conductive layer 1120, and the second electrode 1014 of the first light-emitting element 1010 is electrically connected. The second conductive layer 2120 is in direct contact with and electrically connected.

  The second support 2100 and the third support 3100 are arranged so that the third conductive layer 2130 and the fourth conductive layer 3120 face each other. Between the second support body 2100 and the third support body 3100 facing each other, the second light emitting element 1020 and the third light emitting element 1030 are disposed. As described above, the first electrode 1022 of the second light-emitting element 1020 is in direct contact with and electrically connected to the third conductive layer 2130, and the second electrode 1024 of the second light-emitting element 1020 is electrically connected. The fourth conductive layer 3120 is in direct contact with and electrically connected. The first electrode 1032 of the third light-emitting element 1030 is in direct contact with and electrically connected to the third conductive layer 2130, and the second electrode 1034 of the third light-emitting element 1030 is electrically connected to the fourth conductive layer 2130. Direct contact and electrical connection with layer 3120.

<First intermediate layer 1200 and second intermediate layer 1300>
The first intermediate layer 1200 is filled between the first support 1100 and the second support 2100 facing each other. The second intermediate layer 1300 is filled between the second support 3100 and the third support 3100 facing each other. The first intermediate layer 1200 and the second intermediate layer 1300 are formed of an electrically insulating material having translucency and flexibility (flexibility).

  As for the translucency, the total light transmittance (JISK7105) is preferably 50% or more. The first intermediate layer 1200 and the second intermediate layer 1300 are formed of a thermoplastic resin such as an acrylic elastomer, for example. Each of the first intermediate layer 1200 and the second intermediate layer 1300 has a thickness of 175 μm to 290 μm, for example.

  The first intermediate layer 1200 and the second intermediate layer 1300 are formed of a material having at least one of a Vicat softening temperature of 80 to 160 ° C. and a tensile storage elastic modulus of 0.01 to 10 GPa. The tensile storage modulus shows a value between 0 ° C and 100 ° C. Furthermore, it is preferable that the first intermediate layer 1200 and the second intermediate layer 1300 do not melt at the Vicat softening temperature, and the tensile storage modulus at the Vicat softening temperature is 0.1 MPa or more. The first intermediate layer 1200 and the second intermediate layer 1300 preferably have a melting temperature of 180 ° C. or higher, or a melting temperature that is 40 ° C. higher than the Vicat softening temperature. Furthermore, the first intermediate layer 1200 and the second intermediate layer 1300 preferably have a glass transition temperature of −20 ° C. or lower.

  Here, the Vicat softening temperature is a value obtained under A50 conditions described in JIS K7206 (ISO 306: 2004) under the conditions of a test load of 10 N and a heating rate of 50 ° C./hour. The glass transition temperature and the melting temperature are values obtained by heat flux differential scanning calorimetry at a temperature rising rate of 5 ° C./min using a differential scanning calorimeter by a method according to JIS K7121 (ISO 3146). . The tensile storage elastic modulus was raised at a constant rate of 1 ° C./min from −100 ° C. to 200 ° C. using a dynamic viscoelasticity automatic measuring instrument in accordance with JIS K7244-1 (ISO 6721), and a frequency of 10 Hz. This is the value obtained in.

  The first intermediate layer 1200 and the second intermediate layer 1300 are made of a translucent insulating resin, particularly an elastomer, that satisfies the characteristics such as the Vicat softening temperature, tensile storage elastic modulus, melting temperature, and glass transition temperature described above. Preferably it is. The elastomer is an elastic body of a polymer material. As elastomers, acrylic elastomers, olefin elastomers, styrene elastomers, ester elastomers, urethane elastomers and the like are known. The acrylic elastomer that satisfies the above-described properties is excellent in fluidity at the time of softening, adhesion after curing, weather resistance, etc. in addition to translucency, electrical insulation, flexibility, etc., and the first intermediate layer 1200 And it is suitable as a constituent material of the second intermediate layer 1300. Further, the elastomer as the constituent material of the first intermediate layer 1200 and the second intermediate layer 1300 is the first conductive layer 1120 of the first intermediate layer 1200 and the second intermediate layer 1300 formed by using the elastomer. It is further preferable that the peel strength (according to method A of JIS C5061 8.1.6) with respect to the second conductive layer 2120, the third conductive layer 2130, and the fourth conductive layer 3120 is 0.49 N / mm or more. . The first intermediate layer 1200 and the second intermediate layer 1300 only need to contain the above-described elastomer as a main component, and contain other resin components, fillers, additives, and the like as necessary. Also good.

<Holding of First Light-Emitting Element 1010, Second Light-Emitting Element 1020, and Third Light-Emitting Element 1030>
As described above, the first support 1100 has flexibility, and the thickness of the first intermediate layer 1200 is the same as that of the first electrode 1012 and the second electrode 1014 of the first light-emitting element 1010. Less than the distance between. Therefore, the first support 1100 protrudes in the direction away from the first light emitting element 1010 along the normal direction of the first support 1100 with the first light emitting element 1010 as the center, and is elastically deformed. (Not shown). Due to the elastic deformation of the first support 1100, a biasing force toward the first light emitting element 1010 is generated along the normal direction of the first support 1100. By this urging force, the first conductive layer 1120 is pressed toward the first electrode 1012, the contact state between the first conductive layer 1120 and the first electrode 1012 is improved, and the contact resistance is reduced.

  Similarly, the second support 2100 is also flexible, and as described above, the thickness of the first intermediate layer 1200 is the same as that of the first electrode 1012 included in the first light-emitting element 1010 and the second thickness. It is smaller than the distance between the electrodes 1014. The second support 2100 protrudes in the direction away from the first light emitting element 1010 along the normal direction of the second support 2100 with the first light emitting element 1010 as the center, and is elastically deformed (FIG. Not shown). Due to the elastic deformation of the second support 2100, a biasing force toward the first light emitting element 1010 is generated along the normal direction of the second support 2100. By this urging force, the second conductive layer 2120 is pressed toward the second electrode 1014, the contact state between the second conductive layer 2120 and the second electrode 1014 is improved, and the contact resistance is reduced.

  As described above, the first light emitting element 1010 is sandwiched between the first support body 1100 and the second support body 2100 and pressed by the urging force and stably held.

  Similarly, the third conductive layer 2130 is pressed against the first electrode 1022 of the second light-emitting element 1020 by elastic deformation of the second support 2100, and the third conductive layer 2130 and the first electrode 1022 are pressed. The contact state is improved and the contact resistance is reduced. The fourth conductive layer 3120 is pressed against the second electrode 1024 of the second light-emitting element 1020 by elastic deformation of the third support 3100, and the fourth conductive layer 3120, the second electrode 1024, The contact state is improved and the contact resistance is reduced. Further, the second light emitting element 1020 is sandwiched between the second support 2100 and the third support 3100 and is pressed and held stably by the urging force.

  Furthermore, the third conductive layer 2130 is pressed against the first electrode 1032 of the third light emitting element 1030 by elastic deformation of the second support 2100, and the third conductive layer 2130 and the first electrode 1032 are pressed. The contact state is improved and the contact resistance is reduced. The fourth conductive layer 3120 is pressed against the second electrode 1034 of the third light emitting element 1030 by elastic deformation of the third support 3100, and the fourth conductive layer 3120, the second electrode 1034, The contact state is improved and the contact resistance is reduced. Furthermore, the third light emitting element 1030 is sandwiched between the second support 2100 and the third support 3100, and is pressed by an urging force and stably held.

  Note that as a material of the first conductive layer 1120, the second conductive layer 2120, the third conductive layer 2130, and the fourth conductive layer 3120, the first light-emitting element 1010, the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third conductive layer 3120 are used. In the case where a material softer than the light-emitting element 1030 is used, the first conductive layer 1120 and the second conductive layer 2120 are deformed according to the first light-emitting element 1010, and the third conductive layer 2130 and the fourth conductive layer 2120 are deformed. The conductive layer 3120 is deformed in accordance with the second light emitting element 1020 and the third light emitting element 1030. By this deformation, the contact state between the first electrodes 1012, 1022 and 1032 and the second electrodes 1014, 1024 and 1034 can be further improved, and the contact resistance can be further reduced.

<Arrangement of First Light-Emitting Element 1010, Second Light-Emitting Element 1020, and Third Light-Emitting Element 1030>
A plurality of first light emitting elements 1010 are juxtaposed on the first intermediate layer 1200. When the plurality of first light emitting elements 1010 are arranged so that the first light emitting elements 1010 adjacent in the first intermediate layer 1200 are excessively close to each other, the first support 1100 and the second support are provided. The interval at which the body 2100 can be sufficiently deformed cannot be secured, and the urging force generated by the elastic deformation of the first support body 1100 and the second support body 2100 becomes small. For this reason, the first conductive layer 1120 cannot be sufficiently pressed against the first electrode 1012, and the second conductive layer 2120 cannot be sufficiently pressed against the second electrode 1014. The electrical contact state between the layer 1120 and the first electrode 1012 and the electrical contact state between the second conductive layer 2120 and the second electrode 1014 must be reduced. In addition, it may be difficult to stably hold the first light-emitting element 1010.

  Similarly, a plurality of second light emitting elements 1020 and third light emitting elements 1030 are juxtaposed on the second intermediate layer 1300. When the plurality of second light emitting elements 1020 and the third light emitting elements 1030 are arranged so that the second light emitting elements 1020 and the third light emitting elements 1030 adjacent in the second intermediate layer 1300 are too close to each other. In this case, it is not possible to ensure a sufficient interval for the second support 2100 and the third support 3100 to be deformed, and the biasing force generated by the elastic deformation of the second support 2100 and the third support 3100 is not possible. Becomes smaller.

  Therefore, the state of electrical contact between the third conductive layer 2130 and the first electrode 1022 of the second light-emitting element 1020, the second conductive layer 3120 and the second electrode 1024 of the second light-emitting element 1020, or the like. , Electrical contact state between the third conductive layer 2130 and the first electrode 1032 of the third light emitting element 1030, and fourth conductive layer 3120 and the third light emitting element 1030. The electrical contact state with the second electrode 1034 must be lowered. In addition, it may be difficult to stably hold the second light-emitting element 1020 and the third light-emitting element 1030.

  On the other hand, when the first light emitting element 1010, the second light emitting element 1020, and the third light emitting element 1030 are arranged close to each other in both the first intermediate layer 1200 and the second intermediate layer 1300. The second light emitting element 1020 and the third light emitting element 1030 are pressed by the first light emitting element 1010, and the first light emitting element 1010 is pressed by the second light emitting element 1020 and the third light emitting element 1030. It is possible to improve the electrical contact state by pressing each other.

  That is, when the first light emitting element 1010 protrudes toward the second intermediate layer 1300, the second support 2100 is elastically deformed toward the second intermediate layer 1300. By the elastic deformation of the second support 2100, the third conductive layer 2130 is pressed against the first electrode 1022 of the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third conductive layer 2130 is pressed by the third light-emitting element 1030. One electrode 1032 is pressed. Accordingly, the contact state between the third conductive layer 2130 and the first electrode 1022 of the second light-emitting element 1020 and the contact between the third conductive layer 2130 and the first electrode 1032 of the third light-emitting element 1030 are reduced. The state can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the second light emitting element 1020 and the third light emitting element 1030 protrude toward the first intermediate layer 1200, the second support 2100 is elastically deformed toward the first intermediate layer 1200. To do. By the elastic deformation of the second support 2100, the second conductive layer 2120 is pressed against the second electrode 1014 of the first light emitting element 1010. Accordingly, the contact state between the second conductive layer 2120 and the second electrode 1014 of the first light-emitting element 1010 can be improved.

  Specifically, for both the first intermediate layer 1200 and the second intermediate layer 1300, the adjacent first light emitting element 1010, second light emitting element 1020, and third light emitting element 1030 are in front view, A two-dimensional close-packed structure can be formed by being positioned so as to be positioned at the apex of the equilateral triangle, and the first light emitting element 1010, the second light emitting element 1020, and the third light emitting element 1030 Can improve each other's contact state.

  Note that when the first light-emitting element 1010, the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third light-emitting element 1030 are too close to each other, the first support 1100, the second support 2100, and the third support In some cases, the body 3100 cannot be elastically deformed sufficiently. Therefore, it is preferable that the first light-emitting element 1010, the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third light-emitting element 1030 be spaced apart as appropriate. For example, the first light-emitting element 1010, the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third light-emitting element are separated by about the thickness of the first support 1100, the second support 2100, and the third support 3100. 1030 is preferably arranged.

  As described above, the first light-emitting element 1010, the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third light-emitting element 1030 are staggered at equal intervals for both the first intermediate layer 1200 and the second intermediate layer 1300. By arranging in this manner, the first light emitting element 1010, the second light emitting element 1020, and the third light emitting element 1030 can be arranged close to each other. The first light-emitting element 1010, the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third light-emitting element 1030 are arranged close to each other and emit light from each, thereby increasing the resolution of the light-emitting member 1000 and displaying desired information in detail. can do.

  Note that if contact state and holding stability can be ensured, the first light emitting element 1010, the second light emitting element 1020, and the third light emitting element 1030 may partially overlap each other as well as being arranged alternately. You may arrange in.

<Circuit pattern>
4A is a front view showing a circuit pattern formed on the first conductive layer 1120, and FIG. 4B is a front view showing a circuit pattern formed on the third conductive layer 2130. is there. 4A and 4B are the same as the regular triangle shown in FIG. 1B, and the first light emitting element 1010 is provided at each vertex of the regular triangle. The second light emitting element 1020 and the third light emitting element 1030 are located.

  As described above, the first electrode 1012 of the first light-emitting element 1010 is electrically connected to the first conductive layer 1120. Specifically, the first electrode 1012 of the first light emitting element 1010 is electrically connected to each of the end portions 1122A, 1122B, 1122C,... Of the circuit pattern formed in the first conductive layer 1120. Is done. In this manner, by controlling power feeding to each of the plurality of first light emitting elements 1010, light emission of the first light emitting element 1010 can be adjusted separately.

  The third conductive layer 2130 is electrically connected to the first electrode 1022 of the second light-emitting element 1020 and the first electrode 1032 of the third light-emitting element 1030. Specifically, the first electrode 1022 of the second light-emitting element 1020 is electrically connected to each of the end portions 2132A, 2132B, 2132C,... Of the circuit pattern formed in the first conductive layer 1120. The first electrode 1032 of the third light emitting element 1030 is electrically connected to each of the end portions 2134A, 2134B, 2134C,. In this manner, the second light emitting element 1020 and the third light emitting element 1020 are controlled by controlling the power feeding to each of the plurality of second light emitting elements 1020 and the power feeding to each of the plurality of third light emitting elements 1030. The light emission of the light emitting element 1030 can be adjusted separately.

  As described above, the circuit pattern of the first light emitting element 1010 is formed in the first conductive layer 1120, and the circuit pattern of the second light emitting element 1020 and the third light emission are formed in the third conductive layer 2130. A circuit pattern of the element 1030 was formed. As described above, the circuit patterns of the first light-emitting element 1010, the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third light-emitting element 1030 can be formed by being dispersed in the first conductive layer 1120 and the third conductive layer 2130. it can. That is, by forming different circuit patterns for the first conductive layer 1120 and the third conductive layer 2130, circuits of the first light-emitting element 1010, the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third light-emitting element 1030 are used. Patterns can be distributed and formed. By forming such a circuit pattern, a power feeding structure to the first light emitting element 1010, the second light emitting element 1020, and the third light emitting element 1030 can be simplified.

  The first light emitting element 1010 can be a red LED element, the second light emitting element 1020 can be a green LED element, and the third light emitting element 1030 can be a blue LED element. By adjusting the light emission of the first light emitting element 1010, the second light emitting element 1020, and the third light emitting element 1030, various kinds of information such as character information and figures can be displayed in multiple colors on the light emitting member 1000. .

  4A illustrates a circuit pattern formed in the first conductive layer 1120, and FIG. 4B illustrates a circuit pattern formed in the third conductive layer 2130. A similar circuit pattern can be formed for the conductive layer 2120 and the fourth conductive layer 3120. Note that in the case where the second electrodes 1014 of the plurality of first light-emitting elements 1010 may be electrically connected to the second conductive layer 2120 in common, the second base 2110 may be connected over the entire surface. The conductive layer 2120 can be formed. Similarly, the second electrode 1024 of the plurality of second light-emitting elements 1020 and the second electrode 1034 of the plurality of third light-emitting elements 1030 may be electrically connected to the fourth conductive layer 3120 in common. In that case, the fourth conductive layer 3120 can be formed over the entire surface of the third base 3110.

<Connection with drive circuit>
The first conductive layer 1120, the second conductive layer 2120, the third conductive layer 2130, and the fourth conductive layer 3120 are connected to a driver circuit (not shown). A current for driving the first light-emitting element 1010 is supplied to the first conductive layer 1120 and the second conductive layer 2120. As a result, lighting, extinction, emission intensity, and the like of the first light emitting element 1010 are controlled. Similarly, current for driving the second light-emitting element 1020 and the third light-emitting element 1030 is supplied to the third conductive layer 2130 and the fourth conductive layer 3120. Accordingly, the lighting and extinction of the second light emitting element 1020 and the third light emitting element 1030, the light emission intensity, and the like are controlled.

  The drive circuit is connected to the main control board M, the sub control board S, the prize ball payout control board KH, etc., and various kinds of signals are supplied from the main control board M, the sub control board S, and the prize ball payout control board KH according to the progress of the game. A control signal is supplied to the drive circuit.

<Light emission of first light-emitting element 1010, second light-emitting element 1020, and third light-emitting element 1030>
When a voltage is applied between the first electrode 1012 and the second electrode 1014 of the first light-emitting element 1010, the first light-emitting element 1010 emits light. The first support 1100 has a light-transmitting property, and light emitted from the first light-emitting element 1010 passes through the first support 1100. For this reason, the light emitted from the first light emitting element 1010 can be visually recognized from the outside on the first support 1100 side.

  In addition, since the second support 2100, the third support 3100, and the second intermediate layer 1300 also have a light-transmitting property, light emitted from the first light-emitting element 1010 is emitted from the second support 2100, The light passes through the second intermediate layer 1300 and the third support 3100. For this reason, the light emitted from the first light emitting element 1010 can be visually recognized from the outside on the third support 3100 side.

  As described above, the light emitted from the first light-emitting element 1010 can be visually recognized from both the outside on the first support 1100 side and the outside on the third support 3100 side.

  Similarly, when a voltage is applied between the first electrode 1022 and the second electrode 1024 of the second light-emitting element 1020, the second light-emitting element 1020 emits light. The first support 1100, the second support 2100, and the first intermediate layer 1200 have a light-transmitting property, and light emitted from the second light-emitting element 1020 is emitted from the second support 2100, the first intermediate layer 1200, and the first support 2100. The intermediate layer 1200 and the first support 1100 are transmitted. For this reason, the light emitted from the second light-emitting element 1020 can be visually recognized from the outside on the first support 1100 side.

  In addition, since the third support 3100 also has a light-transmitting property, light emitted from the second light-emitting element 1020 passes through the third support 3100. For this reason, the light emitted from the second light emitting element 1020 can be visually recognized from the outside on the third support 3100 side.

  As described above, the light emitted from the second light-emitting element 1020 can be viewed both from the outside on the first support 1100 side and from the outside on the third support 3100 side.

  Further, when a voltage is applied between the first electrode 1032 and the second electrode 1034 of the third light-emitting element 1030, the third light-emitting element 1030 emits light. Similarly to the second light emitting element 1020, the light emitted from the third light emitting element 1030 can be visually recognized from the outside on the first support 1100 side and the outside on the third support 3100 side. it can.

  In order for the light emitted from the first light emitting element 1010 to reach the third support 3100, it is necessary to pass through the second intermediate layer 1300. In addition, light emitted from the second light-emitting element 1020 and the third light-emitting element 1030 needs to pass through the first intermediate layer 1200 in order to reach the first support 1100. Therefore, depending on the material and thickness of the first intermediate layer 1200 and the second intermediate layer 1300, the first light emitting element 1010, the second light emitting element 1020, and the third light emitting element 1030 are supplied. Accordingly, the intensity of light emitted from the first light-emitting element 1010, the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third light-emitting element 1030 can be made uniform.

  In the above-described example, the light emitted from the first light emitting element 1010, the second light emitting element 1020, and the third light emitting element 1030 is emitted from the outside on the first support 1100 side to the third support. Although the case where it can be visually recognized from the outside on the 3100 side is shown, light may be emitted only from the first support 1100 side or only from the third support 3100 side. The materials constituting the first light-emitting element 1010, the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third light-emitting element 1030, the first conductive layer 1120, the second conductive layer 2120, the third conductive layer 2130, and the fourth The direction in which light is emitted can be controlled by appropriately using a material that forms the conductive layer 3120 or the like.

  Note that in the case where the first light-emitting element 1010, the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third light-emitting element 1030 itself have a light-transmitting property, the first electrodes 1012, 1022, and 1032, the second electrode 1014, By making 1024 and 1034 small, the emitted light is hardly blocked and the amount of light emitted to the outside of the light emitting member 1000 can be increased.

  The light-emitting member 1000 functions as a light source that can emit multicolor light by emitting light using the first light-emitting element 1010, the second light-emitting element 1020, and the third light-emitting element 1030 that have different emission colors. . The light emitting member 1000 functions as a display device that can display various patterns in addition to characters, figures, symbols, character images, and the like by controlling the display mode of each of the plurality of light emitting regions 100. .

  Note that as described above, the circuit pattern of the first light-emitting element 1010 is formed in the first conductive layer 1120, and the circuit pattern of the second light-emitting element 1020 and the third pattern are formed in the third conductive layer 2130. A circuit pattern of the light emitting element 1030 is formed. Each of these circuit patterns can group several light emitting regions 100 and light emitting elements to form a plurality of sets. For example, only the light emitting region 100 corresponding to the first set of circuit patterns can emit light, or only the light emitting element corresponding to the second set of circuit patterns can emit light. Further, only the light emitting region 100 corresponding to the third set of circuit patterns can be turned off. By forming a plurality of sets in this way, when power is supplied to one set of circuit patterns of the plurality of sets, the light emitting regions 100 connected to the one set of circuit patterns are simultaneously the same. Depending on how the light emitting region 100 and the light emitting elements are combined, such as causing each light emitting element to emit light, causing each of a plurality of light emitting element groups to emit light, and causing all the light emitting areas 100 to emit light. The number of production patterns can be made different.

  As described above, the light emitting member 1000 is a member that functions as a light source or a display device. By this light emitting member 1000, a transmissive effect display device TSG for executing effects can be configured. Specifically, the transmissive effect display device TSG includes a light emitting member 1000, a drive circuit, and a connection cable. Below, the example which applies the permeation | transmission effect display apparatus TSG to a pachinko game machine and a rotating type game machine is demonstrated.

<< Transparency effect display device TSG in pachinko machines >>
In the pachinko gaming machine, as a member for arranging the transmission effect display device TSG, there are mainly a transparent plate D16, a game board D35, various decorative cover members DC, a center decoration D38, various movable body accessories YK, and the like. . Here, the decorative cover member DC is, for example, various game effect lamps D26 (which is a collective term for so-called decorative lamps such as underframe lamps and side lamps), a figure case FC, an effect display device SG, a center decoration D38, an inner lens. It is a generic name of cover members such as, and is a member to which the transmissive effect display device TSG can be applied. Further, when a mechanical reel unit (not shown) is used as an alternative to the effect display device SG, a protective cover (decorative cover member DC) can be disposed to protect the reel unit. Further, a transmissive effect display device TSG can be used instead of the effect display device SG.

<When placed on the transparent plate D16>
The transmission effect display device TSG can be arranged (attached) on the back surface of the transparent plate D16. The transparent plate D16 is made of a transparent material such as a glass plate, and is disposed on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine (the front side when viewed from the player) and is positioned to face the player. The player views the game board through the transparent plate D16 and the transmissive effect display device TSG.

  It should be noted that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine and the transparent plate D16 is the front side as viewed from the player (the direction facing the player), and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine and the transparent plate D16 is the back side as viewed from the player. (The direction away from the player).

  The transmissive effect display device TSG may be disposed on the entire back surface of the transparent plate D16 or may be disposed on only a part thereof. When the transmissive effect display device TSG is disposed only on a part of the transparent plate D16, the positions, shapes, and sizes of various effect members such as the effect display device SG and the movable body accessory YK disposed on the game board. The size, shape, position, etc. of the transmission effect display device TSG may be determined according to the above. Various images can be displayed on the transmission effect display device TSG while ensuring the visibility of the effect display device SG and the movable body accessory YK. The player can visually recognize both the image displayed on the transmission effect display device TSG and the image displayed on the effect display device SG. Even when the transmissive effect display device TSG is arranged over substantially the entire surface of the transparent plate D16, the main control board M such as the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display device B20 is used. Display related to information on the state controlled by the main control board M is made so that the light emitting area 100 of the transmissive effect display device TSG does not overlap the front surface of the display device for displaying the information on the state to be controlled. Is preferably configured so that the player can visually recognize (easily visually recognize).

  On the transparency effect display device TSG, images such as characters and figures for instructing and informing the player are displayed. As described above, the transmissive effect display device TSG disposed on the transparent plate D16 is disposed on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine, and is not obstructed by the effect display device SG, the movable body accessory YK, or the like. An image can be displayed on the device TSG. The player can visually recognize the image displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG without being disturbed by the image displayed on the effect display device SG or the operation of the movable body accessory YK.

  In particular, an image can be displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG so as to cover at least part of the effect display device SG and the movable body accessory YK. That is, an image displayed on the effect display device SG and an image at least partially overlapping with the operation of the movable body accessory YK can be displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG, and an effect (effect effect) or the like can be supplementarily provided. Can be displayed. The player can visually recognize the image displayed on the effect display device SG or the operation of the movable body accessory YK and the image displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG in an overlapping manner.

  For example, a tempering line indicating that the tempering has been performed can be displayed. Specifically, when the decorative symbol in the left column and the decorative symbol in the right column are stopped and displayed with 7 symbols, if 7 symbols stop in the middle row, the 7 symbols will be aligned and the jackpot symbol will stop. This will be notified. In this way, when the remaining one decorative symbol stops at a predetermined decorative symbol, the state where the big hit symbol stops is referred to as tempering or reaching. Further, as will be described in detail later, the Tempe line, which is an image associating the 7 symbols in the left column with the 7 symbols in the right column, can be used as an area of a gap between adjacent columns or between the 7 symbols in the left column and the right column. Displayed in the area connecting the 7 symbols in the row.

  In addition, an image is displayed when a hold display (including a hold display after a hold change effect is executed), when a hold change effect is executed, or when an effect that operates a sub-input button SB such as a button hit effect is executed. I can do it. For example, for an effect image such as a button hit effect, a character “V” is displayed on the transparency effect display device TSG as an effect for executing the button hit effect when the symbol related to the jackpot symbol changes and notifying the result of the button hit effect. There are imitated images.

  In the case where the effect display device SG is provided, the transparency effect display device TSG is arranged or the image is displayed so as not to hinder the visibility of the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device SG. It is preferable to define a display area of the sex effect display device TSG. On the other hand, an image is displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG so as to overlap the decorative design displayed on the effect display device SG, or an image is displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG in synchronization with the movement of the decorative design. Or may be displayed. Similarly, various types of information may be displayed on the transmission effect display device TSG by superimposing or synchronizing in accordance with the operation of the movable article YK.

<When placing on a game board>
A transmission effect display device TSG can be arranged (attached) on the back side of the game board. When the game board is formed of a light-transmitting material (such as an acrylic board), for example, when it is formed of a transparent material, the image displayed on the transmission effect display device TSG is displayed on the game board. It can permeate | transmit toward the surface on the front side from the surface on the back side. Therefore, the player can visually recognize various images displayed on the transparent effect display device TSG disposed on the back side surface of the game board via the game board.

  The surface on the front side of the game board is a surface on the near side as viewed from the player (a direction toward the player), and is a surface side on which a game area where the game ball rolls is formed. The surface on the back side of the game board is the surface on the back side (direction away from the player) as viewed from the player.

  The transmissive effect display device TSG may be affixed to the entire back side surface of the game board or may be affixed only to a part of the back side surface. It is preferable to attach the transmissive effect display device TSG only to a position or range that does not overlap (do not interfere with) the effect display device SG. Even if an image is displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG at a position or range that overlaps the effect display device SG, the image is hindered by the effect display device SG, and the player cannot visually recognize the image. Even if the transmissive effect display device TSG is affixed to the entire surface of the back side of the game board, no image is displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG in a position or range overlapping with the effect display device SG. What should I do? In addition, not only when the transparency effect display device TSG is attached to the entire surface of the back side of the game board, but also a plurality of transparency effect display devices TSG are attached according to the area where the light emission effect is executed. May be. Furthermore, by arranging a plurality of transmissive effect display devices TSG in the same area or by arranging the transmissive effect display device TSG in a folded state, the position of light emission (light source position) is three-dimensional. You may make it comprise.

  Further, the transmissive effect display device TSG may be pasted so as not to overlap with various decorative cover members DC and the movable body accessory YK. When the decorative cover member DC or the movable body accessory YK is formed of a translucent member, the decorative cover member DC or the movable body role is obtained by pasting the transparent effect display device TSG so as to overlap. It is possible to emit light so as to be mixed with the light emission of the object YK, or to display an image so as to overlap with each other, thereby enhancing the effect. On the other hand, when pasting so as not to overlap with the decorative cover member DC and the movable body accessory YK, the transparent effect display device TSG is provided so as not to disturb the light emission of the decorative cover member DC and the operation of the movable body accessory YK. An image can be displayed.

  Even when the transmissive effect display device TSG is attached to the entire back surface of the game board, the transmissive effect display device TSG in a position or range that does not overlap with the decorative cover member DC or the movable body accessory YK. By displaying the image, it is possible to display the image on the transmissive effect display device TSG so as not to disturb the light emission of the decorative cover member DC and the operation of the movable body accessory YK.

  Thus, since various images are displayed from the back side surface of the game board by the transmission effect display device TSG, various information can be displayed without reducing the visibility of the movement of the game ball. In addition, various information can be displayed in synchronization with light emission of various decorative cover members DC and movable body accessory YK.

  Note that the transmissive effect display device TSG may be disposed on the front side surface of the game board as long as the position does not hinder the game ball, the movable body accessory YK, or the like.

<When placing on the decorative cover member DC>
The decorative cover member is mainly made of a resin such as a light-transmitting plastic, is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape, and has irregularities. The decorative cover member DC is arranged so as to be visible on the front side surface of the game board. The decorative cover member DC is disposed at the corners of the game board or at the top, bottom, left and right ends.

  The transmissive effect display device TSG can be attached to the front side surface or the back side surface of the decorative cover member DC. The transmissive effect display device TSG may be attached to the transmissive effect display device TSG by appropriately selecting the front side surface or the back side surface according to the shape and size of the unevenness of the decorative cover member DC. What is necessary is just to select the surface on the front side or the surface on the back side according to the effects of the pasting and the effects such as light collection and light diffusion. Furthermore, you may affix on both the surface of a front side, and the surface of a back side. The production effect can be enhanced by using separate light emitting modes for the front side surface and the back side surface.

  The transmissive effect display device TSG is flexible, and even if the decorative cover member DC has a curved shape, the transmissive effect display device TSG is deformed according to the curved shape, and the decorative cover member DC is obtained. It can be stuck and adhered. The transmissive effect display device TSG has a thin plate shape such as a sheet shape, and is formed so as to be easily processed such as cutting and notching. By making incisions, notches, and the like, the transmission effect display device TSG can be curved in accordance with a more complicated shape. Furthermore, by transforming a part formed by the cut not only along the front side but also the back side of the decorative cover member DC, the light emission effect in the decorative cover member DC is interesting such as a three-dimensional effect. Can be further enhanced. The cut may be made at a position that does not overlap with the circuit patterns formed in the first conductive layer 1120, the second conductive layer 2120, the third conductive layer 2130, and the fourth conductive layer 3120 of the transmissive effect display device TSG. .

  Conventionally, the decorative cover member DC is given a certain color or pattern, and a lamp (lamp substrate) is arranged on the back side of the decorative cover member DC. The decorative cover member DC is illuminated by light emitted from the lamp. Thus, conventionally, the colors that can be expressed by the decorative cover member DC are limited by the color and pattern applied to the decorative cover member DC and the light emission color of the lamp arranged on the back side of the decorative cover member DC.

  However, by using the transmissive effect display device TSG as the decorative cover member DC, it is possible to change the light emission color according to the timing of the progress of the game and to emit light in a plurality of light emission colors. Furthermore, light emission modes such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emission color, light emission intensity (luminance), and light emission portion (pattern or figure) can be determined according to the progress of the game. The transmissive effect display device TSG may be arranged on the surface of a diffusing lens member (not shown) provided inside the decorative cover member DC, or may be arranged on both.

<Center decoration D38>
The center decoration D38 is mainly an effect display device SG, various movable body accessories YK, and the like that are arranged in the approximate center of the game board. The center decoration D38 is a decorative member disposed around the effect display device SG and the movable body accessory YK, and is integrally formed. Furthermore, the center ornament D38 may be formed so as to include various movable body accessories YK. The center ornament D38 is mainly composed of a resin such as a light-transmitting plastic, is formed in a three-dimensional shape, and has irregularities.

  Similar to the decorative cover member DC, the transmissive effect display device TSG can be attached to the front side surface or the back side surface of the center ornament D38. The transmissive effect display device TSG may be attached to the transmissive effect display device TSG by selecting a front side surface or a back side surface according to the shape and size of the unevenness of the center decoration D38. What is necessary is just to select the surface on the front side or the surface on the back side according to the effects of the pasting and the effects such as light collection and light diffusion. Furthermore, you may affix on both the surface of a front side, and the surface of a back side. The production effect can be enhanced by using separate light emitting modes for the front side surface and the back side surface.

  The transmissive effect display device TSG is flexible, and even if the center ornament D38 has a curved shape, the transmissive effect display device TSG is deformed according to the curved shape and is in close contact with the center ornament D38. Can be attached.

  By displaying various images on the transmissive effect display device TSG and variously emitting light, the periphery and the periphery of the effect display device SG can be decorated. By arranging the transmission effect display device TSG only in the center decoration D38. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the type and operation of the symbol displayed on the effect display device SG.

  Further, the transmissive effect display device TSG may be arranged to cover not only the decorative cover member DC but also at least a part of the effect display device SG. When the transmissive effect display device TSG is arranged so as to cover at least a part of the effect display device SG, an image that is at least partially superimposed on the image displayed on the effect display device SG is displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG. Can be displayed. The player can view the image displayed on the effect display device SG and the image displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG in an overlapping manner.

  Conventionally, the center ornament D38 is given a certain color or pattern, and a lamp (lamp substrate) is arranged on the back side of the center ornament D38. The center ornament D38 is illuminated by light emitted from the lamp. Thus, conventionally, the colors that can be expressed by the center ornament D38 are limited by the color and pattern attached to the center ornament D38 and the emission color of the lamp arranged on the back side of the center ornament D38.

  However, by using the transmissive effect display device TSG as the center decoration D38, it is possible to change the light emission color according to the timing of the progress of the game and to emit light in a plurality of light emission colors. Furthermore, light emission modes such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emission color, light emission intensity (luminance), and light emission portion (pattern or figure) can be determined according to the progress of the game.

<Various movable objects YK>
The movable body accessory YK is mainly provided on the front surface of the game board. The transmissive effect display device TSG can be disposed on the front surface of the movable body accessory YK or inside the movable body accessory YK. Depending on the structure, shape, size, and operation of the movable body accessory YK, the front side surface or the inside may be appropriately determined. When the transmission effect display device TSG is arranged on the front side surface of the movable body accessory YK, it may be attached according to the shape or size of the front side surface. Moreover, what is necessary is just to affix the transparency production display device TSG according to the internal structure of the movable body accessory YK, when arrange | positioning the transparency production display device TSG inside the movable body accessory YK.

  Further, the transmissive effect display device TSG may be affixed to both the front surface and the inside in a superimposed manner. Further, the transmission effect display device TSG has flexibility, and even when the front side surface and the internal structure of the movable body accessory YK have a curved shape, the transmission effect display according to the curved shape. The device TSG can be deformed and adhered in close contact.

  Conventionally, like the decorative cover member DC, the members constituting the movable body accessory YK are limited in colors that can be expressed with a certain color or pattern. However, the transparent effect display device TSG is used as a movable body role. By using the object YK, the emission color can be changed according to the timing of the progress of the game and the like, and light can be emitted with a plurality of emission colors. Furthermore, light emission modes such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emission color, light emission intensity (luminance), and light emission portion (pattern or figure) can be determined according to the progress of the game.

  As described above, the movable body accessory YK is provided on the front side of the game board. However, when the game board is formed of a material having translucency, the movable body accessory YK is played. It may be provided on the back side of the board. Similarly, when the movable body accessory YK is provided on the back side surface of the game board, the transmissive effect display device TSG is arranged on the front side surface or inside of the movable body accessory YK, so that the progress of the game can be improved. Light can be emitted in various light emission modes depending on the timing.

<Protective cover that protects the reel unit when a mechanical reel unit is used instead of the effect display device SG>
When a mechanical reel unit (not shown) is used instead of the effect display device SG, a protective cover (not shown) curved along the front of the cylindrical reel of the reel unit can be attached. Note that the front surface of the reel unit is a front side (a direction facing the player) when viewed from the player, and is a side where the reel can be visually recognized.

  The transmissive effect display device TSG can be attached to the protective cover. The transmissive effect display device TSG may be attached to the entire surface of the protective cover or may be attached to only a part thereof. What is necessary is just to determine the position and magnitude | size which affix the transparency production | presentation display apparatus TSG according to arrangement | positioning, shape, and magnitude | size of a reel. Furthermore, what is necessary is just to determine the position and magnitude | size which affix the transparency production display device TSG according to the position where a symbol stops.

  By using the transmissive effect display device TSG, in a reel unit covered with a protective cover having a curved shape on the front, a superimposed image display and an auxiliary effect display are provided so as to cover the displayed pattern. Can be executed.

  An image can also be displayed on the transmission effect display device TSG so as to cover at least a part of the reel unit. That is, an image that is at least partially overlapped with the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the reel unit can be displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG, and an effect display can be performed supplementarily. The player can visually recognize the symbol that is stopped and displayed on the reel unit and the image displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG.

  For example, a tempering line indicating that the tempering has been performed can be displayed. Specifically, when the decorative symbol in the left column and the decorative symbol in the right column are stopped and displayed with 7 symbols, if 7 symbols stop in the middle row, the 7 symbols will be aligned and the jackpot symbol will stop. This will be notified. In this way, when the remaining one decorative symbol stops at a predetermined decorative symbol, the state where the big hit symbol stops is referred to as tempering or reaching. Further, as will be described in detail later, the Tempe line, which is an image associating the 7 symbols in the left column with the 7 symbols in the right column, can be used as an area of a gap between adjacent columns or between the 7 symbols in the left column and the right column. Displayed in the area connecting the 7 symbols in the row.

  In addition, an image is displayed when a hold display (including a hold display after a hold change effect is executed), when a hold change effect is executed, or when an effect that operates a sub-input button SB such as a button hit effect is executed. I can do it. For example, for an effect image such as a button hit effect, a character “V” is displayed on the transparency effect display device TSG as an effect for executing the button hit effect when the symbol related to the jackpot symbol changes and notifying the result of the button hit effect. There are imitated images.

<Transparency effect display device TSG as an alternative to effect display device SG>
Instead of the effect display device SG, a transmissive effect display device TSG can be used. Various images such as symbols and characters displayed on the effect display device SG can be displayed on the transparency effect display device TSG in the same manner. An effect can be produced in the same manner as the conventional effect display device SG. It can be made thinner than the conventional effect display device SG, and a space in which various devices can be arranged can be secured or reduced in weight. In addition, the shape and size of the transmissive effect display device TSG can be made as desired according to the type of pachinko gaming machine, and images that cooperate with various effect devices are displayed to enhance the effect effect. Can do.

<< Target device that needs to suppress electromagnetic waves >>
The target devices that need to suppress electromagnetic waves in pachinko machines are mainly a main control board M, a sub-control board S, a prize ball payout control board KH, a relay board (not shown), and a movable body accessory YK drive. A device (solenoid, motor, etc.), an effect display device SG, and various cables.

<Main control board M>
The main control board M is a board for determining the progress of the game, and is a board on which various basic processes are executed in the gaming machine. For example, a lottery process, a process for shifting a game state, and the like are executed on the main control board M. Such processing of the main control board M needs to be executed accurately and fairly, and the lottery result may not change due to the influence of electromagnetic waves, or the gaming state may not shift to an unintended gaming state. desirable. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, the main control board M is prevented from malfunctioning due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves, so that various kinds of original processes are accurately executed. There is a need.

<Sub control board S>
The sub-control board S is a board for mainly controlling the effect, and the effect is determined based on various information related to the game transmitted from the main control board M. The production content is a valuable information source for the player to infer or judge the game state. For this reason, when the electromagnetic wave is emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, the sub control board S malfunctions, the effect result notified to the player changes, and the effect result is different from the actual game result. If the notification is made, it is no longer a user-friendly game machine, and the entertainment is significantly impaired. Therefore, it is necessary to perform the original effect without causing the sub-control board S to malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic waves.

<Prize ball payout control board KH>
The prize ball payout control board KH is a board for controlling payout of game balls to the player. Whether or not game balls are paid out, the number of game balls to be paid out, etc., must be handled accurately and fairly. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, the original operation is accurately executed without causing the prize ball payout control board KH to malfunction due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves. There is a need.

<Relay board>
The relay board (not shown) is a board for electrically connecting a plurality of control boards such as the main control board M and the sub control board S and other electric members. The relay board needs to appropriately transmit a control signal generated from one control board to another control board or an electric member. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, it is necessary to accurately transmit the original control signal without the control signal being modulated by the influence of the electromagnetic wave. The electric member includes a driving member that is electrically driven based on a control signal such as a solenoid or a motor, a sensor that outputs various electric signals such as a coil, and a light emitter such as a lamp.

<Moving body accessory YK drive device (solenoid, motor, etc.)>
The movable body accessory YK driving device includes a driving device such as a solenoid and a motor (not shown). The movable body accessory YK is driven by the movable body accessory YK driving device, and performs various operations visible to the player such as movement and rotation. The movable body accessory YK is an important member that can change the game state by the player, and the operation of the movable body accessory YK needs to be a reproducible and constant operation according to the control signal. is there. Further, it is necessary to accurately detect a sensor for detecting the operation of the movable body accessory YK and output a detection signal. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, the control signal is not modulated by the influence of the electromagnetic waves, and the movable body accessory YK driving device or sensor does not malfunction. It is necessary to perform an original operation or output an original detection signal by the control signal.

<Production display device SG>
Various effect images are displayed on the effect display device SG. The effect content by the effect image is valuable information for the player to infer or judge the game state. Therefore, it is necessary to display the effect image appropriately. It is necessary to make the contents of the production accurately visible by preventing the image from being disturbed or preventing the color modulation from occurring. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, it is necessary to display the original effect image without disturbing the image due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves or malfunctioning the effect display device SG. There is.

<Various cables (not shown)>
In addition to cables for connecting the control boards, cables for connecting various electric components are covered with a conductive member. The cables need to appropriately transmit various control signals and the like. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, the original control signals and detection signals are accurately transmitted without the control signals and detection signals being modulated by the influence of the electromagnetic waves. There is a need.

<< Transparency effect display device TSG in the reel type game machine P >>
In the rotary type gaming machine P, as a member for arranging the transmissive effect display device TSG, mainly the middle panel D110, the upper panel D130, the lower panel D140, the console D190, the movable body accessory YK, and the decorative cover member DC (For example, a cover member in front of the movable body accessory YK, a cover member of the game effect lamp D26), a reel M50, and the like. Further, the transmissive effect display device TSG can be used as a substitute for various display devices, a substitute for the effect display device SG, and a substitute for the reel M50.

<Medium panel D110>
A reel window D160 (opening) is formed at the center of the middle panel D110. Three reels M50 are arranged so that the player can visually recognize the symbol through the reel window D160. The front surface of the middle panel D110 faces the player, and the back surface of the middle panel D110 faces three reels. The transmissive effect display device TSG can be disposed on both the front surface and the back surface of the middle panel D110. The thickness of the transmissive effect display device TSG is thin, and the transmissive effect display device TSG can be arranged on the front side surface and the back side surface of the middle panel D110.

  The front side of the middle panel D110 is the front side (direction facing the player) when viewed from the player, and the back side of the middle panel D110 is the back side (direction away from the player) when viewed from the player. is there.

  The transmissive effect display device TSG disposed on the middle panel D110 is preferably disposed so as not to overlap the reel window D160. Even when various images are displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG, the symbols displayed through the reel window D160 do not overlap with each other, and the visibility of the symbols can be maintained. On the other hand, the transmissive effect display device TSG may be arranged so as to overlap the reel window D160. In particular, when the reel M50 is used exclusively for production, the production effect can be enhanced by displaying various images on the transmissive production display device TSG so as to be superimposed on the design of the reel M50. Furthermore, even when the transmissive effect display device TSG is arranged so as to overlap the reel window D160, the visibility of the symbol is ensured by displaying an image on the transmissive effect display device TSG in an area that does not overlap with the symbol. can do. The “region that does not overlap the symbol” is a region excluding the effective line (the symbol display region where the winning determination is performed), and in the region other than the effective line, the light emission of the transmission effect display device TSG is at a position overlapping the symbol. The region 100 may be provided. For example, when one line that goes up to the right composed of the lower stage of the left reel, the middle stage of the middle reel, and the upper stage of the right reel is an effective line, an area other than the three symbol display areas constituting the effective line ( In the upper and middle stages of the left reel, the upper and lower stages of the middle reel, and the middle and lower stages of the right reel, the light emitting region 100 of the transmissive effect display device TSG may be provided at a position overlapping the symbols.

  The decorative display for effect can be displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG arranged on the front surface of the middle panel D110. The effect decoration display can be an alternative display of a lamp for notifying that BB has been won, an alternative display of a lamp for displaying a gaming state (such as an AT state), or the like. A light emitting device such as a conventional lamp can be replaced by a decorative display for effects. Furthermore, various information such as push order display, replay, start, weight lamp, and the like can be displayed on the transmission effect display device TSG on the front side of the middle panel D110.

  By displaying various kinds of information as described above on the transmission effect display device TSG on the front side of the middle panel D110, the player can visually recognize the gaming state. As described above, various information can be displayed on the single transmission effect display device TSG, and a plurality of lamps and display devices arranged on the middle panel D110 can be omitted. The configuration can be simplified.

  Further, the transmissive effect display device TSG arranged on the back surface of the middle panel D110 emits light toward the three reels M50. The transmissive effect display device TSG emits light toward the inside of the gaming machine and can illuminate the surfaces of the three reels M50. In particular, when the reel M50 is stopped, the stopped symbol can be illuminated. Moreover, according to the combination of the symbol which stopped, it can illuminate by changing light emission modes, such as luminescent color, blink, and light emission intensity (luminance). "

<Upper panel D130>
The transmissive effect display device TSG can be disposed on the back surface of the upper panel D130. The transmissive effect display device TSG may be arranged on the entire back surface of the upper panel D130 or only on a part thereof. If the position and size where the transmissive effect display device TSG is arranged are determined according to the position, shape and size of various members such as the effect display device SG and the movable body accessory YK arranged together with the upper panel D130. Good.

  The back side of the upper panel D130 is the back side of the protective cover that covers the front of the effect display device SG and the movable body accessory YK, and is the back side (the direction away from the player) as viewed from the player.

  Furthermore, it is also known that the conventional swivel type gaming machine P does not use the effect display device SG or the like, but has a certain pattern on the upper panel D130, and the pattern is only illuminated from the back side by the lamp. Yes. In such a conventional swivel-type gaming machine P, the colors and patterns that can be expressed on the upper panel D130 by the colors and patterns attached to the upper panel D130 and the light emission color of the lamp arranged on the back side of the upper panel D130. It was limited.

  However, by configuring the upper panel with two resin panel members and interposing the transmissive effect display device TSG and the decorative sheet between them, it is an effect device that only displays the decoration of the panel at the time of non-production. Even in such a case, by using the transmissive effect display device TSG, it is possible to change the emission color according to the timing of the progress of the game and emit light in a plurality of emission colors. Furthermore, light emission modes such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emission color, light emission intensity (luminance), and light emission portion (pattern or figure) can be determined according to the progress of the game. As an example, the winning combination list in the spinning-type game machine P is printed on a decorative sheet sandwiched between the upper panels, and the light emission of the transmission effect display device TSG arranged at the position of the winning combination or the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination By making the area 100 emit light, it is possible to execute a winning combination notification effect (AT) or a winning notification effect.

<Lower panel D140>
The transmissive effect display device TSG can be disposed on the back surface of the lower panel D140. The transmissive effect display device TSG may be disposed on the entire back surface of the lower panel D140 or may be disposed on only a part thereof. What is necessary is just to determine the position and magnitude | size which arrange | position the transparency display apparatus TSG according to the position, shape, and magnitude | size of various members, such as the movable body accessory YK arrange | positioned with the lower panel D140.

  Conventionally, on the back side of the lower panel D140, in order to secure a space for arranging a substrate serving as a light source such as an LED for illuminating the lower panel D140 from the back side, and a distance necessary for light diffusion from the LED on the substrate. Although a concave space was required behind the panel D140, by disposing the thin transmissive effect display device TSG on the lower panel D140, there is no need for a space for the light source, and in the space where the light source was disposed, Various other devices can be installed, and the space behind the lower panel D140 can be used effectively. For example, a heavy bass speaker, a woofer, or the like can be disposed in the space behind the lower panel D140.

  In addition, the back side of the lower panel D140 is a back side (a direction away from the player) when viewed from the player.

  Further, conventionally, a sheet with a certain pattern is arranged on the lower panel D140, and the pattern is illuminated from the back side by a lamp. Conventionally, the light diffused in the space provided on the back side of the lower panel D140 described above irradiates the sheet from the back side in a wide range. The colors and patterns that can be expressed by the lower panel D140 are limited to the uniform colors and patterns and the emission color of the lamps arranged on the back side of the lower panel D140.

  However, by using the transmission effect display device TSG for the lower panel D140, it is possible to change the light emission color or light emission site in accordance with the timing of the game, and to emit light in a plurality of light emission colors and light emission patterns (combinations). Therefore, unlike the conventional monotonous production, the interest of the production can be improved. Furthermore, light emission modes such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emission color, light emission intensity (luminance), and light emission portion (pattern or figure) can be determined according to the progress of the game.

<Alternative to various display devices>
By using the transmissive effect display device TSG instead of various display devices such as an insertion number display lamp, an operation state display lamp, a special gaming state display device, a payout number display device, a push order display device, a credit number display device, etc. By displaying various kinds of information on the transparent effect display device TSG that can display these information as the game progresses without arranging and controlling a plurality of display devices (lamp substrates), Since it can be arranged at any location according to the outer shape of the game machine P, it can be arranged with a higher degree of freedom than a plate-like board.

<Operation console D190>
The console D190 is mainly a console portion on which members that can be operated by the player such as the bet button D220 and the medal slot D170 are provided. The console D190 includes an operation panel (members that can be operated by the player). A member that can be operated by the player, such as a bet button D220 and a medal slot D170, is attached to the operation panel.

  The transmissive effect display device TSG can be arranged on the back surface of the cover member provided on the surface layer of the operation panel. The transmissive effect display device TSG may be disposed on the entire back surface of the operation panel or a part thereof. It is preferable to arrange the sub input button SB, the bet button D220, and the medal insertion slot D170 in a position, shape (for example, forming an opening corresponding to the operating device) and size that do not interfere with the sub input button SB, the bet insertion port D170. For example, the transmissive effect display device TSG can be arranged only in the surrounding area or the peripheral area of each of the sub input button SB, the bet button D220, and the medal insertion slot D170. By displaying an image on the transmissive effect display device TSG so as to correspond to these members, information regarding the members can be clearly seen by the player. In addition, on the back side of the console D190, the wiring of buttons and the like are arranged in a complicated manner, and the positions where the light emitting element substrates can be arranged are limited. Therefore, sheet-like light emission like the transmissive effect display device TSG is performed. By using the member, it is possible to arrange the transmissive effect display device TSG by appropriately processing or deforming according to the parts or wiring of the console D190.

  For example, information indicating that the sub input button SB, the bet button D220, and the medal insertion slot D170 are operable can be displayed on the transparency effect display device TSG. By displaying such information, the player can smoothly advance the game while viewing various information. Further, help information regarding the operation of these members may be displayed. In addition, information on errors that have occurred regarding these operations may be displayed. Further, although the transmissive effect display device TSG is arranged avoiding various buttons, the transmissive effect display device TSG is arranged in the unit so that the portion exposed on the surface in the button unit emits light. May be. The transparent effect display device TSG provided in these button units performs, for example, a light emission effect at a timing corresponding to an effective operation period of the buttons, or identifies each effective period and ineffective period. It is also possible to control so as to perform different light emission effects.

<Figure case in front of movable body accessory YK and movable body accessory YK>
Examples of the movable body accessory YK include a figure. The transmission effect display device TSG can be arranged on the figure itself or a figure case for protecting the figure (details will be described later).

  The transmission effect display device TSG can be affixed to the front side surface or the back side surface of the movable body accessory YK. The transmission effect display device TSG may be affixed by appropriately selecting the surface on the front side or the surface on the back side according to the uneven shape of the movable article YK. What is necessary is just to select the surface on the front side or the surface on the back side according to the effects of the pasting and the effects such as light collection and light diffusion. Furthermore, you may affix on both the surface of a front side, and a surface of a back side superimposed. The production effect can be enhanced by using separate light emitting modes for the front side surface and the back side surface.

  The transmission effect display device TSG has flexibility, and even when the surface of the movable body accessory YK has a curved shape, the transmission effect display device TSG is deformed according to the shape of the surface, It can be stuck along the surface. The transmissive effect display device TSG has a thin plate shape such as a sheet shape, and is formed to be easily processed such as cutting. When the shape of the movable body accessory YK is complicated, it can be made to correspond to the shape by processing the transparent effect display device TSG such as cutting. The cut may be made at a position that does not overlap with the circuit patterns formed in the first conductive layer 1120, the second conductive layer 2120, the third conductive layer 2130, and the fourth conductive layer 3120 of the transmissive effect display device TSG. .

  In addition, the transmissive effect display device TSG can be arranged on the back surface of the figure case that protects the movable body accessory YK. The transmissive effect display device TSG may be disposed on the entire back surface of the figure case or only on a part thereof. What is necessary is just to determine the position and magnitude | size which arrange | position the transparency production | presentation display apparatus TSG according to the shape and magnitude | size of a figure case, the position, magnitude | size, shape, etc. of the movable body accessory YK. Moreover, even if the transparency effect display device TSG has flexibility and the surface of the figure case has a curved shape, the transparency effect display device TSG is deformed according to the shape of the surface, Can be attached in close contact with each other.

  Conventionally, the movable body accessory YK is given a certain color or pattern, and the colors that can be expressed are limited. By using the transmission effect display device TSG, it is possible to change the emission color according to the progress of the game, the position of the movable body accessory YK, etc., and to emit light in a plurality of emission colors. Furthermore, light emission modes such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emission color, light emission intensity (luminance), and light emission portion (pattern or figure) can be determined according to the progress of the game.

  Further, not only the movable body accessory YK but also the figure case, the operation of the movable body accessory YK is determined by determining the light emission mode of the transmissive effect display device TSG according to the operation and the light emission mode of the movable body role YK. In addition, an effect synchronized with the light emission mode can be performed in the figure case, and the effect can be synergistically enhanced by both the effect of the movable body accessory YK and the effect of the figure case.

<Various lamp cover members such as decorative lamp unit D150>
A lamp cover member (also referred to as a decorative cover member DC) such as the decorative lamp unit D150 is mainly composed of a resin such as a light-transmitting plastic, is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape, and has irregularities. The lamp cover member is given various colors and patterns. The lamp cover member is disposed so as to be visible on the front side surface of the spinning cylinder type gaming machine P. For example, the lamp cover member is disposed at a corner portion of the casing of the rotary type gaming machine P or at the top, bottom, left, and right ends. Further, a lamp (lamp substrate) is disposed on the back side of the lamp cover member, and the lamp cover member is illuminated from the back side by the lamp.

  The front side of the spinning machine P is the front side (the direction facing the player) as viewed from the player, and the back side of the spinning machine P is the back side (game) as viewed from the player. Direction away from the person).

  The transmissive effect display device TSG can be disposed on the front surface or the back surface of the lamp cover member. The transmissive effect display device TSG may be attached by appropriately selecting the front side surface or the back side surface according to the uneven shape of the lamp cover member. What is necessary is just to select the surface on the front side or the surface on the back side according to the effects of the pasting and the effects such as light collection and light diffusion. Moreover, you may affix on both the front side surface and the back side surface in a superimposed manner. The production effect can be enhanced by using separate light emitting modes for the front side surface and the back side surface.

  The transmissive effect display device TSG has flexibility, and even if the surface of the lamp cover member has a curved shape, the transmissive effect display device TSG is deformed according to the curved shape, and the lamp cover member It can be stuck and adhered.

  Conventionally, a certain color or pattern is given to the lamp cover member, and a lamp (lamp substrate) is arranged on the back side of the lamp cover member. The lamp cover member is illuminated by light emitted from the lamp. Thus, conventionally, the colors that can be expressed by the lamp cover member are limited by the color and pattern applied to the lamp cover member and the light emission color of the lamp arranged on the back side of the lamp cover member.

  However, by using the transmissive effect display device TSG as the lamp cover member, it is possible to change the emission color according to the timing of the progress of the game and emit light in a plurality of emission colors. Furthermore, light emission modes such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emission color, light emission intensity (luminance), and light emission portion (pattern or figure) can be determined according to the progress of the game.

  Further, by using the transmissive effect display device TSG, a member such as a lamp substrate for illuminating the lamp cover member from the back side becomes unnecessary, and various members such as a figure and a movable body accessory YK are provided on the back side of the lamp cover member. Space can be secured. The lamp substrate may be provided in the lamp cover member as in the prior art, and the transmissive effect display device TSG may be disposed on the back side of the lamp cover member.

<Transparency effect display device TSG as an alternative to effect display device SG>
Instead of the effect display device SG, a transmissive effect display device TSG can be used. Various images such as symbols and characters displayed on the effect display device SG can be displayed on the transparency effect display device TSG in the same manner. An effect can be produced in the same manner as the conventional effect display device SG. It can be made thinner than the conventional effect display device SG, and a space in which various devices can be arranged can be secured or reduced in weight. In addition, the shape and size of the transmission effect display device TSG can be made as desired according to the model of the swing type gaming machine P, and an image that cooperates with various effect devices is displayed. Can be increased.

<Overlay on reel M50 or substitute for reel M50>
The transmissive effect display device TSG has flexibility, and the transmissive effect display device TSG is curved along the reel M50, and is disposed on the front side or the back side of the reel M50 (particularly a member called a reel tape to which a symbol is attached). can do.

  Electric power or the like can be supplied to the transmissive effect display device TSG using a slip ring (not shown). The slip ring is a connector composed of a stationary member provided outside and a rotatable rotating member, and is a connector that transmits electric power and various control signals from the stationary member to the rotating member. By electrically contacting the brush provided on the stationary member with the metal ring provided on the rotating member, it is possible to transmit electric power, a control signal, and the like to the ring via the brush. Specifically, by providing a stationary member in the reel unit and a rotating member in the reel M50, it is possible to supply power, a control signal, and the like to the transmissive effect display device TSG on the reel M50 side.

  Various notification effects are displayed on the reel M50 by displaying various images on the transmission effect display device TSG using various periods such as the start wait period of the reel M50 and the operation invalid period before the constant speed. Can be executed. For example, the notice effect can be executed by temporarily turning off the rotating backlight S30 and displaying an image such as a meteor shower on the transmissive effect display device TSG.

  Further, a transmissive effect display device TSG may be used instead of the conventional reel M50. In particular, when the transmissive effect display device TSG is used in place of the reel M50 of the effect reel unit, the effect design image can be displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG, and the effect design image is displayed. Can be displayed while appropriately changing based on the lottery result and the like, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

<< Devices that need to suppress electromagnetic waves in the spinning machine P >>>>
The devices that need to suppress electromagnetic waves in the rotating type gaming machine P are mainly the main control board M, the sub control board S, the medal payout device H, the hopper H40, the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, and the first insertion sensor D20s. , Second input sensor D30s, first payout sensor H10s, and second payout sensor H20s.

<Main control board M>
The main control board M is a board for determining the progress of the game, and is a board on which various basic processes are executed in the rotating game machine P. For example, a lottery process such as a role lottery process, a process for changing a gaming state, a process for controlling the driving of a reel, and the like are executed on the main control board M. Such processing of the main control board M needs to be executed accurately and fairly, and the lottery result may change due to the influence of electromagnetic waves, the gaming state may shift to an unintended gaming state, It is desirable that the operation is not stable and does not affect the game result based on the skill of the player. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, the main control board M is prevented from malfunctioning due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves, so that various kinds of original processes are accurately executed. There is a need.

<Sub control board S>
The sub-control board S is a board for mainly controlling the effect, and the effect is determined based on various information related to the game transmitted from the main control board M. The production content is a valuable information source for the player to infer or judge the gaming state (for example, winning combination). For this reason, when the electromagnetic effect is emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, the sub control board S malfunctions, the effect result notified to the player changes, and the effect result is different from the actual game result. If it is notified, it will be difficult to win the correct winning combination, and it will not be a user-friendly game machine, which will significantly impair the interest. Therefore, it is necessary to perform the original effect without causing the sub-control board S to malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic waves.

<Medal payout device H>
The medal payout device H is a device that pays out medals to a player. In order to pay out medals, a board for relaying a drive signal output from the main control board M to the stepping motor of the hopper H40 is arranged. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves, for example, the rotation of the motor becomes unstable while the medal payout device H is paying out, so that it is discharged. It is necessary to ensure that the original operation is executed accurately without causing malfunction such as clogging of medals.

<Hopper H40>
In the hopper H40, medals are stored, and a motor provided in the hopper H40 is driven, whereby a predetermined number of medals are paid out from the hopper H40. The motor of the hopper H40 needs to operate accurately according to the drive signal. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, it is necessary to perform the original operation accurately without causing the motor of the hopper H40 to malfunction due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves. is there.

<Input Acceptance Sensor D10s, First Input Sensor D20s, and Second Input Sensor D30s>
The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 are counted and stored by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s. Since the number of medals inserted determines the number of games that can be played, it is necessary to strictly manage the detection order of each sensor. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, the number of medals is erroneously counted due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves, or noise is applied to one sensor during insertion. It is necessary to perform the operations of the original insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s accurately without causing an event such as an error and the inserted medal not being accurately counted. There is.

<First Discharge Sensor H10s and Second Discharge Sensor H20s>
The medals paid out from the medal payout exit are counted by the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s. Since the medals to be paid out are lent out to the player, the number of medals to be paid out must be strictly managed. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, the original first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor are not erroneously counted due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves. It is necessary to ensure that the operation of H20s is executed accurately.

<< Members and mechanisms for suppressing electromagnetic waves >>
Below, the member and mechanism for suppressing the electromagnetic wave emitted from the permeation | transmission effect display apparatus TSG are demonstrated. These can be appropriately selected and arranged. These are the configurations common to both the pachinko gaming machine and the swing type gaming machine P.

<Conductive case>
The conductive case is a main control board M, a sub-control board S, a payout control board (in the case of a pachinko game machine, it is a prize ball payout control board KH, and in the case of a revolving game machine P, a medal payout device H). It is a case for storing etc. inside and protecting. The conductive case is made by imparting conductivity to a material having conductivity, for example, a conductive film or a conductive material, which will be described later, to a material having no conductivity, such as a resin such as plastic or acrylic. Including the case of forming or enclosing a metal shield cover. For example, a metal oxide or the like can be used as the conductive material.

  In particular, the main control board M is required to have a case with translucency (transparency). The main control board M is a central board for determining the progress of the game, and it is possible to easily discriminate from the outside of the case that a fraudulent act such as remodeling by parts replacement has been performed. There is a need. For this reason, both conductivity and translucency can be achieved by attaching a translucent and conductive conductive film to a transparent resin case or by forming a translucent and conductive conductive material. By forming the case, the conditions required for the case of the main control board M can be satisfied.

  As the conductive material having a light-transmitting property and a conductive property, a material similar to that of the first conductive layer 1120 to the fourth conductive layer 3120 of the light-emitting member 1000 can be used. For example, it can be formed of a transparent conductive material such as indium tin oxide (ITO), fluorine-doped tin oxide (FTO), zinc oxide (ZnO), or indium zinc oxide (IZO). Furthermore, carbon nanotube (CNT) ink may be used. By forming with carbon nanotube ink, the bending resistance and durability can be enhanced, and the conductivity can be easily maintained even when bent.

<Conductive plate>
The conductive plate is a main control board M, a sub-control board S, a payout control board (a prize ball payout control board KH in the case of a pachinko game machine, and a medal payout device H in the case of a revolving game machine P). In addition, it is a metal plate (shield) that is disposed around or around an electrical member such as the effect display device SG or solenoid and covers a part of these devices. For example, when the conductive case described above cannot be used, the same suppression effect as that of the conductive case can be obtained by using this conductive plate. The electric member includes a driving member that is electrically driven based on a control signal such as a solenoid or a motor, a sensor that outputs various electric signals such as a coil, and a light emitter such as a lamp.

  As in the case of the conductive case, in addition to the case where the plate is formed of a conductive material such as metal, a non-conductive material such as plastic or acrylic is formed by forming a conductive film or conductive material described later. Including the case where a plate is formed by imparting electrical conductivity to a resin.

  In the case of a plate requiring translucency (transparency), a conductive film having translucency in addition to electroconductivity is attached to a transparent resin plate, or translucency and electroconductivity are provided. A conductive plate having both conductivity and translucency can be formed by forming a conductive material having a property on a plate. For example, a metal oxide or the like can be used as a conductive material for forming a film.

<Conductive film>
The conductive film is a conductive film for constituting the conductive case and the conductive plate described above, and the conductive film is attached to the surface of the case or the plate that is not conductive by itself. The conductive case and the conductive plate can be formed.

  In addition to the case where the conductive film itself is a conductive film, a conductive material described later is formed into a film, and a non-conductive material such as a resin film such as plastic or acrylic is used as a base material. Including the case where a conductive film is formed by imparting conductivity. As a method for forming a conductive material on a film substrate, a liquid phase film forming method (such as coating or plating) or a gas phase film forming method (such as physical vapor deposition or chemical vapor deposition) may be appropriately selected. . For example, a metal oxide or the like can be used as the conductive material.

  Furthermore, when translucency (transparency) is required, a conductive film having translucency is formed by forming a translucent conductive material using a transparent film as a base material. Can be formed. As a conductive material having translucency and conductivity, for example, a transparent conductive material such as indium tin oxide (ITO), fluorine-doped tin oxide (FTO), zinc oxide (ZnO), indium zinc oxide (IZO), or the like is used. can do. Furthermore, carbon nanotube (CNT) ink may be used.

<Thin film formation (film formation)>
Thin film formation (film formation) using a conductive material imparts conductivity by forming a conductive material on the surface of a member made of a resin or the like that does not have conductivity. For film formation, a liquid phase film formation method (coating, plating, etc.), a gas phase film formation method (physical vapor deposition method, chemical vapor deposition method, etc.), etc. are appropriately selected according to the target material, size, shape, etc. That's fine.

  For example, a metal oxide or the like can be used as the conductive material. Furthermore, when translucency is required in addition to conductivity, for example, indium tin oxide (ITO), fluorine-doped tin oxide (FTO), zinc oxide (ZnO), indium zinc oxide (IZO), etc. It can be formed of a transparent conductive material. Furthermore, carbon nanotube (CNT) ink may be used.

<< Specific Application Example of Transparency Effect Display Device >>
As described above, the transmissive effect display device TSG according to the present example can be suitably used in various effects of pachinko gaming machines and swivel game machines. Hereinafter, more specific aspects of application of the transmission effect display device TSG to gaming machines will be described as the present embodiment to the second embodiment for pachinko gaming machines, and the third embodiment to the second for spinning cylinder type gaming machines. The fourth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to flowcharts and image diagrams.

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Pitching” includes not only winning a prize ball to be paid out, but also passing to a “through chucker” without winning a prize ball. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, for example, numbers, letters, designs. The thing with the shape of etc. can be mentioned. In this specification, “identification information” may be called a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (design), but the “special symbol (special symbol)” is the main control board. The “decorative pattern (design)” is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. “Displaying identification information” is not limited to a display method. For example, light emission of a light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only whether light is emitted but also a color difference), physical Display (for example, a symbol drawn on a reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). “Direction” refers to display content that enhances the fun of the game. For example, identification information fluctuates / stops, notices, etc., moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photos, characters, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. “Open state, open state” and “closed state, closed state” are, for example, in the configuration of a general big prize opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = non-winning state Easy state. Also, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as advance state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as retreat state) In a configuration (so-called velo-type attacker) that can take the following condition, the advance state = easy-to-win state and the evacuation state = non-easy-to-win state. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) to determine some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard- Random numbers and soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called “basic random numbers” that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, “winning random numbers (random numbers for success / failure lottery)” related to the transition of special games, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol "Variation mode determination random number" for determining, "symbol determination random number" for determining a stop symbol, "hit symbol determination random number" for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the contents of the variation mode, the contents of the definite identification information, etc., and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. Also, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but one entry (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, the random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determining random number + design determining random number... Is referred to as one random number) . Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). In the case of a pachinko gaming machine, the “gaming state” means, for example, a special gaming state in which the grand prize opening can be opened, or a non-stochastic variable gaming state in which the transition lottery probability to the special gaming state is a predetermined value. Probability variation game state with high probability of lottery transition to special game state, auxiliary game state with assistance for winning at start port that becomes lottery trigger for transition to special game (so-called normal symbol short time state, for example, variable at start port) When the member is attached, the variable member has a long open period, the variable member has a high open probability, the variable member open lottery result notification time is short), etc. is there. On the other hand, the “CPU” in the spinning machine is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) used, processing performance, or the like. “Power interruption (power interruption)” means that the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine falls below a certain level regardless of whether the power switch provided on the gaming machine is operated or not. This also includes shutting down the power supply due to unforeseen circumstances such as unit damage or power outages. “ROM” is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and physically retains information (for example, “1” for a device configuration that conducts when a current for reading data is applied, It will be “0” if the device configuration is not.) RAM is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and electrically holds information (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, “1” is stored if it is stored, and it is not stored. It is generally “0.” In general, backup power is supplied to some or all of the data stored in the RAM when the power is interrupted). The “game state” is, for example, a special game state in which a game medal can be easily acquired and advantageous to the player (so-called jackpot game, such as a bonus game, a type 1 BB, a type 2 BB, or the like) ), The re-game probability variation game state (RT state) in which the re-game player win rate is higher (or lower) than the normal game state in which the re-game player win rate is a predetermined value, and the winning role Order of the reels for winning a prize, an AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined, and the like. Also in the normal gaming state, the lottery probability of transition to the RT state, AT state, ART state is different, high probability normal gaming state, low probability normal gaming state, etc. (in this example, referred to as lottery state) ). Also, there is no problem even if the game states are combined {in addition, these game states and functions (for example, a lottery transition to the AT state, output of a notification instruction related to the reel stop order, etc.) control the game progress. There is no problem even if all are mounted on the main control board side}. In this example, the state related to the AT and the RT state are individually described. The RT state is referred to as “RT1” and the state related to the AT is referred to as “normal game state”. As a state relating to ART, the state relating to ART may be referred to as “normal gaming state” or the like. “Winning combination” is the type of condition device (or condition device number) won by internal lottery. The “notification state” is a state related to an AT capable of executing push order navigation described later, and even if a game is won by a condition device that does not execute push order navigation because the winning combination is not different depending on the reel stop order. If the state related to the AT is a state in which the push order navigation can be performed, the “notification state” is set. The “counter value” is also referred to as “notification game executable number”, and is the AT remaining game number or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when “the number of notification games that can be executed” is 1 or more (the game that has become “0” may be included), the push order navigation described later can be executed. In addition, as the “notification game executable number”, the number of game media obtained based on the winning of the small role (mainly the push order bell role) (the number obtained by subtracting the inserted number from the paid-out number) The number of wins for the order bell may be adopted. In addition, the “special notification state” is a state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to the AT, and is referred to as “addition special state” in this example. The “specific condition” is a condition under which the AT counter value can be subtracted. For example, the specific condition is that, for example, one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, push order bell combination) is won.

  Note that this embodiment is merely an example, the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of an embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and another modified example is also described.

<Pachinko machines>
(This embodiment)
First, a pachinko gaming machine according to the present example will be described with reference to modification 1 from the present embodiment to the second embodiment. The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 complex machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applicable to other game machines (for example, conventional 1st type, 2nd type, 3rd type, general pachinko game machines such as general electric roles). . Note that this embodiment is merely an example, the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of an embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and another modified example is also described. In the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa. In addition, in this example, “table” is not limited to the format, and one or more selection candidates are selected from a plurality of selection candidates based on one or more information. It should be understood that this is an associated mode. Furthermore, numerical values (for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each gaming state, etc.) as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modifications are as follows: This is merely an example, and in particular, under different conditions (for example, according to the condition of the first main game side and the second main game side, by the condition of the probability variation game and the non-probability variation game, by the time shortening game and non- It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in the conditions for time-saving games, etc.) may be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the following embodiments and modified examples. Should. For example, on the first main game side and the second main game side, the magnitude relationship between the winning probability at the time of the lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game is as follows: first main game side = second main game side Even if it is illustrated as such, the magnitude relationship may be changed as appropriate so that the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side, etc. Good (same for other values and conditions). Also, for example, when configuring based on the intention that the probability variation gaming state will continue until the next jackpot occurs, whether to set “65535” as the number of continuations (configure to continue substantially), Or, even in the options of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variation game state until the next jackpot occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as it does not greatly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples Should be understood as appropriate.

  Here, before describing each component, the characteristics (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board D35. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball dish D20, a lower ball dish D22, and a launch handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine to a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably storing the game board D35, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 through a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has mechanisms for storing game balls, sending out the game balls to the launching rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray D22. The unit having the upper ball dish D20 is provided with a sub input button SB that the player operates at the time of production. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball tray D20 and the lower ball tray D22, and a sound effect corresponding to the gaming state or the like is output.

  Next, the game board D35 has a game area D30 partitioned by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, the game area D30 includes a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown), various general winning ports, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10, an auxiliary game start port H10, 1st Grand Prize Winner C10, 2nd Grand Prize Winner C20, 1st Main Game Symbol Display Device A20, 2nd Main Game Symbol Display Device B20, Permeability Effect Display Device TSG, Effect Display Device SG, Auxiliary Game Symbol Display Device H20 A movable body accessory YK, a center decoration D38, and an out port D36 are provided. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

  Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game start entrance A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated.

  Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the second main game start entrance B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is changed between a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is more likely to win than the closed state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided, and the game balls flowing down the game area D30 are the first from the right side and the left side. It is comprised so that it can be guide | induced to 1 main game start opening A10 and 2nd main game start opening B10.

  In the present embodiment, the electric combination is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric combination is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are spaced apart from each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 and the first main game start port A10 The two main game start ports B10 may be arranged so as to overlap with each other. In that case, the upper portion of the second main game start port B10 is blocked by the presence of the first main game start port A10. May be.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the auxiliary game start port H10, and generates auxiliary game start port entrance information indicating the entrance at the time of entrance. To do. Note that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery to expand the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in this embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, and the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The game ball that flows down is configured not to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game balls flowing down the right side and the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) may be configured to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10.

  Next, the first grand prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20 are provided above the out mouth D36, and the game balls flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) Before reaching the out opening D36, it is configured to easily pass through the region where the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged.

  Next, the first grand prize winning opening C10 is a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located on the upper right side of D36. Specifically, the first grand prize opening C10 includes a first grand prize opening prize detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d (and a first grand prize prize). A mouth electric accessory solenoid C13). Here, the first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big prize opening C10. Is generated. The first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big prize opening C10 to the first big prize opening C10 in a normal state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first). 1 big prize opening electric accessory solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) As a mode (so-called slide type attacker) that can take a state where the opening on the passage where the game ball can roll is a big prize opening and the opening is closed or opened. Well, it is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is formed in a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located on the upper right side of the opening D36. Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize prize). A mouth electric accessory solenoid C23). Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening C20 are configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d has the second big prize opening C20 in the second big prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker) or an opening on a passage where a game ball can roll is used as a big prize opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide-type attacker). It is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game symbol). It is a device that executes the display and the like. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game game. And a symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of random numbers held (the number of main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is configured with, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is “0” to “9”. ”Is displayed with 10 types of numbers and“ − ”of losing {but not limited to this, a 7-segment LED is set so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display with symbols or the like. In addition, the hold number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, but can be configured to display a maximum of four hold numbers (for example, composed of one lamp, (Equation 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blink, hold number 3: medium blink, hold number 4: fast blink)).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have an effect role, in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, in the case of adopting a technique in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has an effect role and does not display the decorative symbol, the transmission effect display device TSG described later is used. You may comprise so that a 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) may be displayed on the display or presentation display device SG.

  Next, the transmission effect display device TSG is a device that executes display of effect images including decorative symbol variation display / stop display and the like. In this example, the transmissive effect display device TSG is provided on the back side of the game board D35, and the player gives a movable body accessory YK behind the game board D35 and other members (fixed accessories). , Decorative boards on which characters, etc. are drawn) can be seen through. Here, as a specific configuration, the transmissive effect display device TSG includes a transmissive display region TSG10 in which an effect including a variation display of decorative symbols is executed (the transmissive display region TSG10 in the transmissive effect display device TSG is Depending on the embodiment, the light emitting member may be entirely or partially, and it is not appropriate to show a clear boundary. The same applies to other embodiments). Here, the transparent display area TSG10 includes a transparent first hold display unit TSG12 (and a transparent second hold display unit TSG13) that displays main game hold information, and a plurality of decorative symbols, for example, as a 7-segment display. And a transparent decorative symbol display area TSG11 that performs switching display with LEDs arranged in the LED. Although the transmissive effect display device TSG is configured by the light emitting member 1000 using LEDs in the present embodiment, the transmissive effect display device TSG is not limited to this as long as it is a transmissive effect display device. You may be comprised with other display means, such as a liquid crystal and organic EL. The transmissive first hold display portion TSG12 (and the transmissive second hold display portion TSG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are linked with the hold lamps of the main game symbol. Further, in this example, an effect display device SG composed of liquid crystal or the like (the entire device does not have translucency, and the opposite side across the effect display device SG can be viewed from the player side. The display device can be configured to generate effects as synergistic effects by displaying the effects on the two display devices of the display device) and the transmission effect display device TSG. The effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 and a decorative symbol display area SG11.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display related to the auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol changes held (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes not being executed).

  Next, in this example, the center ornament D38 is installed, for example, around the transmissive effect display device TSG, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the transmissive effect display device TSG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect (decoration) lamp D26 is provided in a part of the game area D30 or other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like. In this example, the transmissive effect display device TSG is used to display a decorative design or the like displayed in the center of the game board D35, but is not limited thereto. As a feature of the transmissive effect display device TSG, it is possible to display an effect without installing a lamp substrate or the like (by forming the circuit pattern in the transmissive effect display device TSG to the edge position of the cover, etc. Because the edge becomes a contact point for electrical conduction and power can be supplied by attaching to the gaming machine), it can be attached to the gaming machine via a structure (boss or slit) for accurate positioning By doing so, it can be installed even in places where there is almost no installation space for connectors and wiring. Moreover, when it has sufficient flexibility, it can be applied to various places. That is, the surface of the center decoration D38, the game effect lamp D26 (for example, side lamp, underframe lamp), the lamp cover, the inner lens, and the accessory (including those having an uneven shape such as a movable object YK, a figure). (Or the back surface) and various operation members (sub-input button SB, front surface of firing handle D44) and the like.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and in particular controls overall game operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10) (ie, game Main control board M that performs control directly related to the profits of the player, and effect control means (sub-main control) that performs display control related to various effects on the transmissive effect display device TSG that provides interest to the game content Part) SM, the sub-sub control part SS that mainly executes the effect display, the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT according to the prizes received in the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and each prize opening A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 to be paid out to the dish D20, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (storage ball) of the upper ball dish D20 The gaming area Turn on the launcher DD42 that launches one ball at a time, the launch control board DD40 that controls the launch operation of the launcher DD42, the power supply unit EE that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and the pachinko gaming machine A power switch Ea, which is a switch to be turned off, is provided on the rear surface of the front frame D14 (on the opposite side to the game side).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, pays out a game ball based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG, such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are arranged on one board) for controlling execution of the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit EE that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that performs display processing such as a decorative symbol change display / stop display and a hold display or a notice display on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the winning ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS are a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, and a ROM that stores programs that prescribe the arithmetic processes of the CPU and CPU RAM that temporarily stores data (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.) is installed. Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of each substrate and an electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined.

  First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, 1st prize winning opening prize detection device C11s, 2nd big prize winning prize winning detection apparatus C21s, general winning detection apparatus (not shown, the general winning entry is a winning entry with a winning ball but no symbol lottery. }, A drive solenoid (not shown) (the above-mentioned first big prize opening electric combination solenoid C13, second big prize opening electric combination solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to an input / output device that is indispensable to control the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS). For example, information (commands) related to performance / game progress can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal. The game-related information can be output from an external device to an external device.

  In the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 7, the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to allow one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout apparatus KE that executes payout of game balls, and an apparatus that can be operated by a player, accepts a game ball rental request, and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R for transmission. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (launching handle, firing motor, ball feeding device). Etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is used as a separate body and is adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, the sub-control board S has a transmissive effect display device TSG for displaying effects such as decorative symbols, an effect display device SG, a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other drive devices for effects (non-display). And a sub input button SB for controlling switching of the display mode change in button effect (button repeated effect) (not shown, but in this example, the sub input button SB is connected). And a sub input button input detecting device SBs for detecting that the sub input button SB has been operated). In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and control of the sound output from the speaker D24 by the sub-main control unit SM and game effects ( Decoration) Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of display contents displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG are performed, and the sub-sub control unit SS displays on the transmissive effect display device TSG and the effect display device SG. Control (substantial display control) is performed. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S. However, the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, it is possible to reduce the situation that space is merited and noise is mixed into the wiring or the like by being configured to be integrated). Also, the work sharing between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit integrated with the VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

  Next, game peripheral devices will be described. Since some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are a first main game peripheral device A that is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B that is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. First and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral device HH related to auxiliary games, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and transmission effect display device TSG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control unit SM include the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the result of the game. It concerns only the display of information that has no effect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can display stop and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that can display stop and change display of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And a second grand prize opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device HH includes the auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of supporting the above.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit) ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is sub-game control. Meaning that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After powering on the gaming machine, the process of FIG. That is, after the gaming machine is turned on and initialized (not shown), the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button in step 1002, and the reset button (RAM clear) of the power supply unit EE. Button) has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation of clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed intentionally by a game hall manager or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, stored in the checksum and RAM area recorded at the time of power interruption) Compared to the amount of information available). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is not backed up in the RAM). To do. If YES in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if the data backed up in the RAM in step 1010 is normal, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, the CPUMC of the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM in the main control board M in step 1012. In step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the timing, or the command is set at the timing and will be described later. The control command transmission process may be used for transmission), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M triggers a scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, (b) in FIG. 11 is executed), the processing in step 1018 is performed. Transition. After step 1018, the CPUMC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The CPUMC of the main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 5B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. . Next, in step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an electric accessory driving determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the prize ball payout control board KH to execute a prize ball payout control process (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening where the game ball has won. , Processing for managing the result). Next, in step 1998, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes output processing of external signals (information output to the external terminal board, the hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit side), and immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is executed. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (NMI interrupt in this example), in step 1020, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets power-off information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. . Next, in step 1022, the CPU MC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start port entry determining means MJ11-H determines whether or not a game ball has entered (inflow, passed in the case of a gate) into the auxiliary game start port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether or not the number of hold balls is not the upper limit (for example, 4). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number together with information on what number of the hold is in the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H. 1 is added, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). In addition, also when it is No in step 1102 and step 1104, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric accessory releasing flag is off. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B accesses the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and holds the ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). In addition to the acquisition, the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side gaming state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game short time flag) Is selected, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than in the case of being off), and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, there are “D0, D1, D2” as the stop symbols, and “D1, D2” as the stop symbols as the winning symbols. In the non-time-reduced game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the open mode is (0.2 seconds open → closed), and the open mode of the electric combination that will be opened is stopped. When the symbol is “D2”, the release mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → open for 2.0 seconds, closed) (longest open). In the time-saving game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the release mode is (1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed). When the symbol is “D2”, the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → open for 4.0 seconds → close). Note that the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol “D0” during a non-time-reduced game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a winning symbol “D1” during a time-reduced game.

  Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H determines the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H based on the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game short flag is on and 10 seconds when the auxiliary game short flag is off) is set. In step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the hold information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the hold ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, after the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol change display on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H to determine whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Then, at step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “hit” (D1 · D2 in this example). Determine. In the case of Yes in Step 1230, in Step 1232, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B is based on the winning symbol on the auxiliary game side, and in the release mode (for example, in the case of the winning symbol “D1”). Open for 1 second-> Close for 1 second-> Open for 1 second-> Close for 1 second-> Open for 1 second-> Closed for release symbol "D2": Open for 0.2 seconds, Close for 0.8 seconds, 5), and a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the electric game product is set in the second main game start opening electric game product release timer MP22t-B. Next, in step 1234, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory releasing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game start port electric combination B11d of the second main game start port B10, and proceeds to step 1242. . Note that if the result of Step 1202 is No, the process proceeds to Step 1242. In the present embodiment, when the main game short flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is the predetermined hit symbol (D2), the time for which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is kept open is the longest. Has been.

  Next, in step 1242, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start port electric accessory release timer MP22t-B, and determines the time for opening the electric accessory. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the second main game start port electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game start port electric combination B11d and temporarily stops the auxiliary game state. The electric-power-operating-released flag in the flag area of the storage unit MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  If No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224. If No in steps 1206, 1224, 1230, and 1242, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1300).

  Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step immediately, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next processing after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this processing is performed by performing branch processing using a stop display fixing flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port entrance information has been received from the first main game start port entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start port A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls relating to the main game (especially the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning lottery random number for determining the success / failure, the symbol lottery random number for determining the winning symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers to acquire are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update periods and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired (pending occurrence command) to the sub-main control unit SM. Set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

  Next, in step 1312, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game start port entrance information from the second main game start port entrance detection device B11s of the second main game start port B10. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls relating to the main game (especially the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of the success / failure lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the first main game content determination means. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number on the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number on the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the random determination random number for the first main game and the acquisition lot random number for the second main game) Are set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information indicating that the second main game random number has been acquired (pending occurrence command) to the sub-main control unit SM. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and proceed to the next process (process in step 1400). In the case of No in Step 1302 and Step 1304, the process proceeds to Step 1312. In the case of No in Step 1312 and Step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (Process of Step 1400).

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M and confirms whether there is no hold of the second main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process to be described later, and the next process {the process of steps 1400 (1) and (2). }. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and the next process {steps 1400 (1), (2). The process proceeds to.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the holding of the first main game symbol) However, this is not limited to this, but it is not limited to this (the pending digest based on the winning order and both main game symbols are simultaneously executed in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery for lottery.

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the change start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is that the special game is not being played (or the condition device is being operated), the main game symbol is not changing, and there is a hold of the main game symbol. Although not shown in this example, in the case of providing a variable fixed time (time for displaying the fixed display symbol after the main game symbol is displayed), during the variable fixed time, You may comprise so that it may not satisfy | fill.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M in step 1405 and step 1406. The second main game content determination random number) is read out, deleted from the RAM area of the main control board M, and the remaining stored information temporarily stored is shifted (holding digestion process). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the corresponding game state, and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number). Based on the above, a main game symbol winning lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 14 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game success / failure lottery table (second main game success / failure lottery table). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-stochastic varying gaming state. Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table), determines the main game symbol determination result lottery and the first Based on a main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, a symbol lottery random number), stop symbols relating to the main game symbol are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

  Here, FIG. 14 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “4A, 5A, 7A” and “4B, 5B, 7B”) are selected. One main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of special game rounds determined with reference to the main game symbol is 8R for 4A, 4B, 5A, and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. Note that the types of random numbers and stop symbols are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. May}

  Next, in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table) corresponding to each game state, and the main game symbol. Based on the result of the lottery determination and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number), the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, and these are stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. Is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

  Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 14 is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table). As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the main game symbol variation mode (variation time) for a certain random value can be determined based on the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result and the main game short flag state. Has been. For example, for a certain random number value, when the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result is win, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game short-time flag is on (time-short game) The state) is configured to easily determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short. This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of variation mode (variation time), the selection rate, or the like. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game short-time flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol variation on the second main game side Is configured to be advantageous for the player, it is easy for the second main game side to be suspended by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous for the player). It is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be distinguished in order to establish the situation.

  Next, in step 1414, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs commands (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbols temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and A command related to the current gaming state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side (by the control command transmission process of step 1999, the sub main control unit SM side). To be sent). Next, in step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the main game symbol variation time in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), according to the variation mode stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, the variation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1417, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag, and proceeds to step 1420.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1419, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420. If No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

  Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command for transmitting information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub-main control unit SM side to the effect that the symbol variation ends. It is set in the buffer MT10 (sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) The main game symbol variation display is stopped, and the stop symbol stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is displayed and controlled as a fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

  Next, in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1440, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, in step 1500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). Even in the case of No in step 1420, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1506, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements (decrements) the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game short time flag. Next, in step 1518, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1550). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550) also in the case of No in step 1506, step 1510, or step 1514. In this way, in this example, the remaining short time count (the remaining number of symbol fluctuations in which the time-reduced gaming state is terminated by the number of symbol variation end times after the end of the special game) is transmitted to the sub-control board S. Has been.

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short flag / auxiliary game short flag). Next, in step 1558, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1560, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game transition permission flag. Next, in step 1562, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1600). In the case of No in step 1552, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in steps 1604 and 1606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1607, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets information to start a special game (special game start display instruction command) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1602, in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. In the case of No in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the special game permission has not been granted, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not it is immediately before the start of each round. In the case of Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the set opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that continues to be opened, a pattern that performs opening and closing) is set. Next, in step 1616, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first large winning opening electric combination C11d (or the second large winning opening electric combination C21d) of the first large winning opening C10 to be the first large. The winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) is opened, and a special game timer MP34t (especially an opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the process proceeds to Step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1612, that is, when the big prize opening is being opened, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processing of steps 1614 to 1620.

  Next, in step 1622, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) is assigned to the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) in the round. It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball. If Yes in step 1624, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly, the opening time timer) for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) relating to the opening of the big prize opening. It is determined whether or not elapses. Also in the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. If the answer is No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1997).

  Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first big prize opening electric combination C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). Is stopped and the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1633, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1634, it is determined whether or not the last round has ended (for example, whether or not the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1638, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the special game is to be ended (special game end display instruction command) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side. Set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). In step 1650, a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Even in the case of No in step 1634, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a probable big hit symbol (in this example, “5A, 7A, 5B, and 7B”). In the case of Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag, and proceeds to step 1656. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1652 (in this example, “4A · 4B”), the process proceeds to step 1656. Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined number of times (100 in this example) to the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag. Next, in step 1660, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 25, control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described. First, FIG. 19 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 4D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting, such as when the game machine is powered on. That is, at the time of powering on the gaming machine, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM executes initial processing based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clearing). When information is received → RAM on the sub-control board S side is initialized, and various information commands are received → Production-related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the RAM on the sub-control board S side). Thereafter, the process proceeds to a loop process for repeatedly executing (f) which is a repetitive process routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (f) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. 5F, first, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a hold information management process described later. Next, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decoration symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2800, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process to be described later. Next, in step 2900, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a special game related display control process which will be described later. Next, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a movable body accessory drive control process which will be described later. Next, in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a transparent right-handed instruction display control process described later. Next, in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a display command transmission control process (sends commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and ends this repetitive process routine. To do.

  As described above, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM adopts a form in which the sub-main routine (S2400 to S2999) is loop-processed after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 5E is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is sent to one terminal (in this example) of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM. , NMI terminal) is a processing flow (e). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sends a command input port (described above) from the main control board M side. Check the data signal line input port). In step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area on the sub main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before this interrupt processing. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub control board S has received a command relating to a new hold occurrence (hold information relating to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) from the main control board M side. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the drawing hold counter value (in this example, a maximum of 4 for the first main game and a maximum of 4 for the second main game). Add “1”. Next, in step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the hold information (random number etc.) transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area of the sub control board S, and proceeds to step 2418. .

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2402, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2410, in step 2412, the CPUSC of the sub control board S subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter value. Next, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S deletes the hold information (such as a random value) related to the symbol variation from the RAM area of the sub control board S and shifts the remaining hold information. Next, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2418. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2410, the process proceeds to Step 2418.

  Next, in step 2418, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the drawing hold counter value on the transparent effect display device TSG (particularly, the transparent first hold display portion TSG12 and the transparent second hold display portion TSG13). The same number of on-hold display lamps (on-hold display images) are lit up and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2700).

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag. Next, in step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the temporarily stored symbol information (stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table. Stop symbols for symbols {For example, if the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, it will be "7.7.7" or the like, and if it is a lost symbol, "1.3.5." And the variation mode are determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

  Next, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2800). In the case of No in step 2702, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2800).

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2800 in FIG. First, in step 2802, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2802, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag in step 2804. Next, in step 2806, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol changing flag. Next, in step 2809, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2810. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2802, the process proceeds to Step 2810.

  Next, in step 2810, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2810, in step 2811, the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2812, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has reached the decoration design change start timing based on the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the change mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2812, in step 2814, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the variation of the decorative design on the transparency effect display device TSG (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, Then, the process proceeds to step 2832.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2812, in step 2816, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the decorative design based on the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the change mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. It is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2816, in step 2818, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying a stop display (temporary stop display) of the decorative symbols on the transparency effect display device TSG (display command in step 2999). In the transmission control process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2832.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2816, in step 2824, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the preview image or the It is determined whether or not the reach image display timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2824, in step 2826, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the image display related to the notice image and the reach image on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Then, the process proceeds to step 2832. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2824, the process proceeds to Step 2832. It should be noted that the effect related to the decoration symbol variation may be performed in combination with the transmissive effect display device TSG and the effect display device SG, or the effect display device SG alone, depending on the type of effect. For example, the transmission effect display device TSG and the effect display device SG are configured to distribute the effect to be executed according to the image display capability of the transparency effect display device TSG (the display resolution in the transparency effect display device TSG). You can also. In this case, it is possible to change the display device for executing the effect from the effect display device SG to the transmissive effect display device TSG or the transmissive effect display device TSG to the effect display device SG in the middle of executing the effect. It is good also as performing the said effect simultaneously. On the other hand, when the display performance of the transmissive effect display device TSG is sufficiently high, the effect display device SG as will be described later may be omitted.

  Next, in step 2832, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, receiving information indicating that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed from the main control board M side). Whether or not). In the case of Yes in step 2832, in step 2834, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative symbol on the transmissive effect display device TSG (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side). Next, in step 2836, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2838, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol changing flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). In addition, also when it is No in step 2810 or step 2832, it transfers to the following process (process of step 2900).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2900 in FIG. First, in step 2902, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special gaming flag is OFF. In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2904, in step 2912, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the special gaming flag. Next, in step 2914, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs a big hit start display on the effect display device SG (performs appropriate display based on the type of the big hit), and proceeds to step 2920. Note that if the result is No in step 2902, the process proceeds to step 2920.

  Next, in step 2920, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs a big hit effect on the effect display device SG based on game information (start command and end command of each round) sequentially transmitted from the main control board M side. In addition to the output, a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes on the transmissive effect display device TSG (which may be executed as necessary based on game play, type of jackpot, etc.) is set. Next, in step 2926, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2926, in step 2928, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs jackpot end display on the effect display device SG (performs appropriate display based on the jackpot type). Next, in step 2930, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the special gaming flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Note that if the result is No in step 2904 or step 2926, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2999).

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the movable body accessory drive control process according to the subroutine of step 3150 in FIG. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an accessory driving flag (a flag that is on during a period in which the movable article YK is driven) is off. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the movable object accessory YK such as the accessory driving start timing (pressing of the sub input button SB, start of the reach effect, or during the reach effect). It is determined whether or not a new timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3154, in step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads out information related to the current game based on information from the main control board M (information on the current game state, main game random number, etc.). , Temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

  Next, in step 3158, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the driving mode (for example, driving timing, driving time, driving region, etc.) of the movable body accessory YK based on the information on the game temporarily stored in step 3156. To do. Next, in step 3159, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is based on the information about the game temporarily stored in step 3156, and the fluctuation is caused by the movable body accessory transparency effect (period in which the movable body accessory YK is driven). It is determined whether or not it is a symbol variation that executes the effect performed on the transmission effect display device TSG (based on the temporarily stored information relating to the game and synchronized with the driving mode of the movable body accessory YK). In addition, it is determined whether or not to perform the movable body accessory transparency effect). In addition, the symbol fluctuation | variation which performs movable body accessory permeability | transmittance effect is a symbol fluctuation | variation with a big hit expectation degree which is a fluctuation | variation time of 60 seconds or more, for example (design fluctuation | variation in which predetermined | prescribed effect is performed). For example, the symbol variation in which the execution ratio of the jackpot variation of the symbol variation in which the predetermined effect is executed is high with respect to the sum of the loss variation and the jackpot variation). In the case of Yes in step 3159, in step 3160, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S synchronizes the effect mode of the movable body accessory transmission effect (the driving mode of the movable body accessory YK) based on the temporarily stored information on the game. The presentation mode in which the display changes is preferable). Here, the movable body accessory transparency effect is an effect executed on the transparency effect display device TSG, and is an effect that has a synergistic effect with the driving mode of the accessory configured to be drivable. Next, in step 3161, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the transmissive effect display device TSG (the transmissive effect display device TSG is, for example, the back side of the game board D35 installed in front of the movable body accessory YK, or It is provided on the surface of the movable body accessory YK or on the back side of the transparent plate-like member provided in front of the liquid crystal display device SG, and produces an effect in synchronization with the drive mode of the movable body accessory YK. The command relating to the execution of the movable body accessory transparency effect is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and the process proceeds to step 3162. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3159, the process proceeds to step 3162. Next, in step 3162, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the accessory driving flag, and proceeds to step 3164. Note that if the result is No in step 3152, the process proceeds to step 3164.

  Next, in step 3164, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the accessory drive end timing has been newly reached. Note that the accessory drive end timing is the timing at which the driving process of the movable body accessory YK is completed, and is the timing based on the preset aspect of the movable body accessory transparency effect. This is a judgment. In the case of Yes in step 3164, in step 3166, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the accessory driving flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3200). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3154 or step 3164, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 3200). By configuring in this way, the movable object YK is driven according to the current gaming state and the acquired random number, and the jackpot winning, the transition to the probability variation gaming state, or the time shortening gaming state The expectation of the player regarding the transition to

  Furthermore, as will be described later, when the transmissive effect display device TSG is provided on the back surface of the game board D35 as in this example, the movable body accessory YK is placed in the space behind the game board D35 as viewed from the player. Can be provided. Since the transmissive effect display device TSG has translucency, the player visually recognizes the operation of the movable article YK through the transmissive effect display device TSG capable of displaying the effect. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest by executing various effects in the region overlapping with the movable body accessory YK when viewed from the player on the transparency effect display device TSG. Specifically, as an example of synchronizing with the movable body accessory YK, for example, a part of the front transmissive effect display device TSG emits light strongly so as to overlap the star portion of the movable body accessory YK imitating a constellation. Alternatively, in the case of the transmissive effect display device TSG that can also display such that it does not have translucency (transmittance), the movable object YK is not visually recognized by displaying a door, gas, or the like. After enabling it, there are effects such as making it possible to visually recognize the movable body accessory YK after driving (a mode that suggests that the expected degree of jackpot of the symbol variation during execution is high). In the present embodiment, the transmissive effect display device TSG is provided on the back side of the game board D35. However, the position where the transmissive effect display device TSG is provided is not limited to this, for example, on the center decoration D38. A plate-like member having transparency may be provided in the enclosed region, and the plate-like member may be provided on the back surface.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the transparency right-handed instruction display control process according to Step 3200 in FIG. First, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in step 3204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a transparent first right-handed instruction display and a transparent second right-handed instruction display (during execution of a special game) on the transparent effect display device TSG. In the transmission effect display device TSG, a command for displaying a transparency first right-handed instruction display and a transparent second right-handed instruction display as shown in the lower row is set (in step 2999). In the display command transmission control process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2999). In the case of No in step 3202, in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the current gaming state is a time shortening gaming state (a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state, or a non-probability variation gaming state and It is determined whether or not the time-saving game state.

  In the case of Yes in step 3206, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the transparency first right-handed instruction display on the transparency effect display device TSG (display command transmission control processing in step 2999). And the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2999). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3206, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for erasing the transparent first right-handed instruction display and the transparent second right-handed instruction display (display command in step 2999). Is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the transmission control process), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2999).

  Next, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of a transparent right-handed instruction display. The left side of the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the transparency first right-handed display, and is a message displayed on the transparency effect display device TSG during execution of the special game and in the time-saving game state. As shown in the figure, a right-pointing arrow is displayed in dot display (display similar to dot display) on the upper part of the display area of the transmission effect display device TSG. On the other hand, the lower right side of the figure is an image diagram of the second right-handed display for transparency, and is a message displayed on the transparency effect display device TSG only in the time-saving gaming state. As shown in the figure, the message “right-handed” is displayed in dot display (display similar to dot display) in the arrow-shaped figure on the right side of the transparency effect display device TSG. That is, during the execution of the special game, both the transparent first right-handed instruction display and the transparent second right-handed instruction display are displayed. In this way, in a situation where the player should perform a right strike, a transparent first right strike instruction display and / or a transparent second right strike instruction display, which is a display indicating that a right strike should be performed, is displayed. When a right game is not performed (when a left game is performed), a transparent first right-handed game is performed during the execution of a special game that is significantly disadvantageous to the player. By displaying not only the instruction display but also the transparent second right-handed instruction display, the display mode is more easily recognized by the player.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a player from making a left strike in a game state in which the player should play a right turn and play a game, and a disadvantageous situation for the player occurs. Can be made a user-friendly model. The transparent right-handed instruction display of this example is configured so that the display mode of the transparent right-handed instruction display is different between the execution of the special game and the time-saving game state, but the same display aspect is used. You may comprise. Further, as a display mode, for example, only the right side may emit light (or change its color) or blink. Similarly, when a left hand should be instructed (normal game state or the like), it may be applied as a transparent left hand instruction display. In addition, the player plays an inappropriate game against the instruction, that is, when the player should make a right strike (or when the player should make a left strike), the player is playing a left strike (or a right strike). (For example, when a predetermined number of game balls have entered the entrance that is easy to enter when left-handed and difficult to enter right-handed), or the launch handle D44 is If no operation is performed for a predetermined time, the transparent right-handed instruction display may be flashed in red or a warning message may be displayed. In addition, when two display devices, the transmissive effect display device TSG and the effect display device SG, are provided, the transmissive right-handed instruction display may be displayed. For example, the effect display device SG displays a decorative symbol display, an effect display during execution of a special game, etc. in a display mode having a resolution higher than that of the dot, and the transparent right-handed instruction display is displayed on the transparent effect display device TSG. It may be configured to display in dot display. That is, the resolution of the image displayed on the effect display device SG may be higher than the resolution of the image displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG.

  In this example, a transparent right-handed instruction display is displayed in an area near the center of the game board D35 that does not serve as a flow path for the center game ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game board D35 is not limited thereto. When the transparent effect display device TSG capable of displaying the effect on the entire surface is provided (that is, when the transparent effect display device TSG is also provided on the back surface of the game board D35 in the area where the game balls flow down). Or, when the effect display device SG is provided in the center, the transmissive effect display device TSG is provided outside the center decoration D38 to which the effect display device SG is attached and the game ball flows down. If the player actually performs a right strike, a permeable right strike instruction display can be displayed at a location corresponding to the flow path through which the game ball flows down. For example, the light emitting area 100 on the transmissive effect display device TSG is sequentially turned on and displayed so that blue light emission flows on the flow path of the game ball on the right side of the game ball. In such a case, the recommended flow path may be configured to blink in red. By configuring as described above, the player can more visually understand how to proceed with the game. In the game area of the game board D35, a transmissive effect display device may be provided only around the game area D30 so as not to prevent the visibility of the game area D30.

(Modification 1 from this embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the transmissive effect display device TSG is provided on the back surface of the game board D35, and the synergistic effect with the effect display device SG and other visible structures has been described in detail. The configuration of the sex effect display device TSG is not limited to this. As an example of a configuration using the space provided with the effect display device SG by providing the transmissive effect display device TSG on the entire surface of the game board D35 and not providing the effect display device SG, the following embodiment will be described. The first modification example will be described in detail mainly using an image diagram.

  First, FIG. 26 is an image diagram of a movable body accessory transparency effect according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. First, the change from the present embodiment is that the transmission effect display device TSG is arranged on the surface inside the center decoration D38, the effect display device SG is not provided, and all effects are performed on the transmission effect display device. It is a point. That is, when viewed from the player side, the transparent plate D16, the transmission effect display device TSG (the back of the game board D35), and the movable body accessory YK are provided in this order from the front, and the transmission installed on the game board D35. In the space on the back side (rear side) of the sex effect display device TSG, the movable body accessory YK is installed to be drivable. First, the lower left of the figure is a schematic diagram of the front of the pachinko gaming machine, and the enlarged dotted lines are arranged in time series from the upper left of the figure. The transmissive effect display device TSG is largely arranged in the vicinity of the center of the board of the game board D35, and the “7” symbol as a decorative symbol is stopped to the left and right to reach. Next, the left and right movable body accessories YK provided behind the transmission effect display device TSG are engaged in the vicinity of the center of the board of the game board D35 to form a heart shape. Next, on the transmission effect display device TSG in the front part of the movable body accessory YK, the letters “Gekiatsu” are displayed in dot display (an image similar to dot display), indicating that the expectation of big hit is high Is displayed. On the transmission effect display device TSG, “7” symbols are arranged as stop symbols of the decorative symbols, and then a special game is started. Note that, for example, the characters “superheated” can be directly displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG by providing the transmissive effect display device TSG on the movable body accessory YK (surface). Further, the movable body accessory YK can be driven in front of the game board D35, and the movable body accessory YK can be illuminated from behind by the transmissive effect display device TSG. Further, by providing a transparent effect display device TSG in a superimposed manner on the back surface of the transparent plate D16 (that is, in front of the game board D35), more various effects can be created. When “dot display” is used in the effect of the transmissive effect display device TSG, it is preferable to display the information to be displayed in a simplified manner according to the number of displayable pixels or the like ( For example, “Intense heat” → “Gekiatsu”). In addition, when two display devices, the transmissive effect display device TSG and the dramatization display device SG, are provided, the movable body accessory transmissive effect may be executed. For example, the decoration display is displayed on the effect display device SG in a display mode having a resolution higher than that of the dots, and the display of “Gekiatsu” is displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG as a dot display May be. That is, the resolution of the image displayed on the effect display device SG may be higher than the resolution of the image displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG.

  As described above, according to the pachinko game according to the present embodiment, the transmission effect display device is applied to the game board D35 (the game board D35 has translucency). The transmissive performance display device TSG of this example uses a fine LED element as its light emitting element, and therefore does not require the installation of a normally required LED board. It is difficult to visually recognize the existence, and there is an advantage that the installation location and the production area are not limited. Therefore, in the space behind the game board D35 that has not been used so far, a member (movable body accessory YK, etc.) visible to the player can be installed, and the effect of the member and the effect of the transparency effect display device TSG The variety of production will be expanded by synchronizing.

  FIG. 27 is a transparent character effect image diagram in Modification 1 from this embodiment. In this example, when viewed from the player side, the transparent plate D16, the transmissive effect display device TSG, and the game board D35 are provided in this order from the front. First, four characters are drawn on the game board D35 from the upper left, and the transparent effect display device TSG provided in front of the game board D35 emits light and illuminates the character brightly. . The decorative symbol “7” stops to the left and right, and reaches a reach. Next, the transparency effect display device TSG provided in front of the drawn character is darkened, making it difficult to visually recognize the four characters. Next, when the sub input button SB is repeatedly hit or the like, only the area of the lion's character portion in the transmissive effect display device TSG emits light (lights up), so that the appearance of the lion can be easily seen.

  Furthermore, as a successful production of the sub input button, when the characters are lit brightly one after another and the area of the transparency production display device TSG that overlaps the character parts of all four bodies is lit (lights on), the character “success!” Displayed in the center. Further, the “7” symbol is also stopped in the middle row, and “7” symbols are arranged as stop symbols of the decorative symbols, and the special game is started. The character may be displayed on the transmission effect display device TSG itself. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which displays the number of the characters of lighting or appearing with a number.

  Here, in this example, the transmissive effect display device TSG is provided on the entire surface of the game board D35 and the effect related to the decorative design is also displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, an effect display device SG may be provided inside the center decoration D38 provided on the game board D35, and an effect related to the display of the decorative symbols may be displayed on the effect display device SG. Further, when configured in this way, the transmissive effect display device TSG is installed in an area outside the center decoration D38 on the game board D35 and in a game area D30 in which the game ball can roll (for example, , Reverse side of game board D35). Also in this case, it can be configured such that a transparent character effect can be executed in the same manner as described above by drawing a character on the game board D35 (for example, an acrylic board) in the area.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example 1 from the present embodiment, the character (which may be a symbol, number, pattern, or the like) drawn on the game board D35 is installed on the surface thereof. Since the transmissive effect display device TSG has translucency by configuring the transmissive effect display device TSG to be lit (displayed), the game board D35 itself seems to emit light. It will be possible to perform various effects. In addition, the movable body accessory YK is arranged in front of the game board D35 when viewed from the player, and the movable body accessory YK is floated by irradiating strong light from behind, and further transmitted through the transparent plate D16. The performance display device TSG may be arranged so that a synergistic effect can be executed.

(Second Embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, the transparent effect display device TSG is installed on the back surface of the game board D35 (acrylic plate), and members of the back space that can be visually recognized through the transparency effect display device TSG or the game board The display on D35, the effect display on the effect display device SG, and the like are configured so as to obtain a synergistic effect. It may be configured such that an effect linked with the effect display device SG (for example, a liquid crystal effect display device), the movable body accessory YK, the game effect lamp D26, the center decoration D38, etc. may be provided. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 28 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is the position where the transmissive effect display device TSG is provided, which is configured to be attached to the back surface of the transparent plate D16. That is, in this embodiment, it is configured to be pasted on the back surface of the game board D35 (acrylic board), and as viewed from the player, the transparent board D16, an accessory, etc., an effect display device SG, a transmissive effect display device TSG (game board) D35), in the second embodiment, from the viewpoint of the player, the transmissive effect display device TSG (transparent plate D16), an accessory, etc., the effect display device SG (liquid crystal, etc.), game It is comprised in order of the board D35. By configuring in this way, a game synergistic with the effects of these members is provided in front of the members that can be rendered, such as the effect display device SG such as liquid crystal, the accessory (movable body accessory YK), and the center decoration D38. It can be shown to the person.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 2700 (second) in FIG. 19 according to the second embodiment. First, in step 2702-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2702-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2704-1. Next, in step 2704-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the variation time of the variation is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds). In the case of Yes in step 2704-2, in step 2704-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs pseudo continuous lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3) (pseudo continuous variation is executed by winning. Execute). Here, the pseudo continuous variation means that the main game symbol is changed after repeating the “temporary stop display of left / middle / right symbol → revariation (so-called pseudo variation)” a plurality of times during one variation of the main game symbol. This is an effect technique in which the player is shown to the player as if the main game symbol fluctuates a plurality of times during one change of the main game symbol.

  Next, in step 2704-6, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the pseudo continuous lottery executed in step 2704-4 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2704-6, in step 2704-8, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the information on the stop symbol and the variation mode of the main game symbol, and simulates the variation mode. The mode with continuous fluctuation is determined. Next, in step 2706-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the transmissive pseudo-continuous symbol variation effect pattern (in this example, the transparent symbol variation effect pattern (transparent in this example) On the sex effect display device TSG, an effect pattern in which the number of pseudo fluctuations is displayed in dot display) is determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2706-4, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on a pseudo continuous execution flag (a flag related to whether or not to execute the transparent pseudo continuous symbol variation effect on the transparency effect display device TSG), and in step 2706. Move to -8. On the other hand, in the case of No in steps 2704-2 and 2704-6, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S in step 2706-6 displays the symbol information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S (stop for the main game symbol) With reference to the design variation variation determination lottery table, the decorative symbol stop symbol {for example, if the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, "7-7. If the pattern is a slotted pattern such as “7” or a losing pattern, a variation pattern such as “1, 3, 5”} and a variation mode are determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and then in step 2706-8 Transition.

  Next, in step 2706-8, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2800). In the case of No in step 2702, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2800).

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2800 in FIG. 19 in the second embodiment. First, the differences from the present embodiment are step 2814-1 (second), step 2816-2 (second) to step 2818-4 (second), and step 2830 (second). In step 2812, when the decorative symbol variation start timing is reached, in step 2814-1 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a command for displaying the decorative symbol variation on the effect display device SG (step 2999). Is sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side) in the display command transmission control process of (2), and the process proceeds to step 2832. If the decorative symbol temporary stop display timing is reached in step 2816, in step 2816-2 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous execution flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 2816-2 (second), in step 2816-4 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timing is the final temporary stop timing in the pseudo continuous variation. To do. In the case of Yes in step 2816-4 (second), in step 2816-6 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the pseudo-continuous execution flag, and proceeds to step 28818-1 (second). . On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2816-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2818-1 (second). Next, in step 2818-1 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command (temporary stop command) for displaying the decorative symbols on the effect display device SG, and the process proceeds to step 2832.

  If step 2816-4 (second) is No, in step 2818-2 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a command (temporary stop) for displaying the decorative symbols on the effect display device SG. ) Is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999), and then in step 2818-4 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the pseudo continuous fluctuation. A command for displaying the next pseudo fluctuation number in the transmission effect display device TSG is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999), and the process proceeds to step 2832. Further, in step 2828, when the CPUSC of the sub control board S reaches the notice image or reach effect display timing, in step 2830 (second), the CPUSC sets a command to display an image related to the timing on the effect display device SG. (Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999), and the process proceeds to step 2832. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, while performing the effect of pseudo continuous variation on the effect display device SG, while ensuring the state in which the player can visually recognize the effect, In the region on the transmission effect display device TSG that overlaps the region, a further superimposed effect can be executed.

  Next, FIG. 31 is an image diagram of a transmissive pseudo-continuous variation effect in the second embodiment. In this example, when viewed from the player, the transparent effect display device TSG (for example, provided on the back surface of the transparent plate D16) and the effect display device SG (for example, a liquid crystal display device) are installed in this order. Has been. First, the lower left is a schematic diagram of a pachinko gaming machine, showing the display area of the effect display device SG and the area (displayable area) of the transmissive effect display device TSG that is wider than the display area of the effect display device SG. The area occupied by the transmission effect display device TSG is indicated by a dotted line. The dotted line area is enlarged and displayed, and the effects are shown in time series from the upper left. Note that these regions are not limited to the regions shown in the image diagram, and the transmissive effect display device TSG may be configured to be able to produce effects on the entire transparent plate D16, while a plurality of partial effects may be provided. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the effect display can be performed in such a region, that is, the display region of the effect display device SG is wider.

  Next, an example of the transmissive pseudo-continuous variation effect will be described from the upper left of the figure. A certain symbol variation is started on the effect display device SG. Next, when the symbol is temporarily stopped, the chances of “3”, “3”, and “4” from the left as the stop symbol (temporary stop) of the decorative symbol are stopped, and the second time of the pseudo fluctuation is “× 2” indicating that the pseudo-variation effect is started is displayed on the transparency effect display device TSG in a dot display mode. The player recognizes from the display that the pseudo continuous variation effect is started. After that, the pseudo-variation is executed twice, and at the same time that the chances of “3”, “3”, “4” are stopped again as the decorative symbol stop symbol (temporary stop) in the third pseudo-variation, A display of “× 4” indicating that the fourth change is started is displayed on the transparency effect display device TSG. Next, after the fourth pseudo fluctuation is started, the reach effect is executed on the effect display device SG. Next, after execution of the reach effect, “3” symbols are arranged as stop symbols (determined symbols) of the decorative symbols, and then the special game is started.

  With the configuration described above, when the pseudo continuous variation effect is executed, the effect display device SG performs the pseudo plural variation effect and at the temporary stop timing of the pseudo change next time. It is possible to display the number of times of the pseudo fluctuations in the transmission effect display device TSG. The player can recognize that the pseudo continuous variation is executed by stopping the chance chance at the first temporary stop of the pseudo continuous variation and displaying “× 2” in dots. Furthermore, since the number display is executed continuously, the expectation of the big hit can be obtained, and the interest of the gaming machine is enhanced. In addition, the display of the number of times of execution of the pseudo fluctuation at the temporary stop timing is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo fluctuation may be displayed at the start of the next pseudo fluctuation or at a predetermined timing. Although the number of executions of the pseudo variation is displayed in dots, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect that suggests the degree of expectation may be executed using a video or a character.

  Next, FIG. 32 is another example of the movable body accessory transparency image in the second embodiment. First, in the schematic diagram of the pachinko gaming machine on the lower left of the figure, the effect display device SG is shown at the center of the game board D35, and the transparent effect display device TSG is surrounded by the entire game area including the effect display device SG. (Area) A displayable area is indicated by a dotted line. The displayable area is not limited to these, and the display area of the transmissive effect display device TSG may be narrower than the display area of the effect display device SG, and must be visible to the player. It is good also as a structure which does not provide the transparency production | presentation display apparatus TSG ahead of display. In this example, when viewed from the player side, the transparent effect display device TSG (for example, pasted on the back of the transparent plate D16), the movable body accessory YK, and the effect display device SG are provided in this order. .

  In addition, from the upper left of the figure, the dotted line region in the lower left schematic diagram is enlarged to show the movable body accessory permeability effect in time series. First, in the top left of the figure, the effect display device SG stops the decorative symbol “7” to the left and right, and the reach effect is executed. Next, the movable body accessory YK disposed at the left and right separated positions on the game board D35 is driven to the center of the game board D35, thereby engaging at the center of the game board D35 to form a heart shape. Next, in front of the engaged movable body accessory YK, on the transmissive effect display device TSG on the back surface of the transparent plate D16, the effect with a high expectation level of the big hit (in the center, the characters of "Intense heat" The surrounding heart-shaped display) is executed. Next, the decorative symbols in the middle row are stopped, and “7” symbols are arranged as stop symbols of the decorative symbols, and then the special game is started. By configuring in this way, by driving the movable body accessory YK, it is possible to execute an effect (chance-up effect) in which the expectation for the increased jackpot is further increased by the effect on the transmission effect display device TSG. it can. Furthermore, by using a common effect on the effect display device SG, it is possible to execute a further chance-up effect.

  In this example, the effect on the effect display device SG and the synergistic effect with the movable body accessory YK are executed only by the transparency effect display device TSG on the back surface of the transparent plate D16. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmissive effect display device TSG may be installed on the surface of the movable body accessory YK (for example, “superheated” on the transmissive effect display device TSG in the center of the heart shape). Is displayed). In addition, a transparent effect display device TSG is further installed on the surface of members such as a game effect (decoration) lamp D26, a fixed accessory, a center ornament D38, etc., and by various effects synchronized with the effects as described above, Can give the player a sense of exaltation.

  By configuring as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, by providing the transparent effect display device TSG according to this example on the back surface (or front surface) of the transparent plate D16, the nail, the center There is no restriction on the arrangement of the decoration D38, the movable body accessory YK, the effect display device SG, the first (second) big prize opening C10 (C20), the second big prize opening electric combination C21d, etc., and the game It is possible to execute synergistic effects with the various members provided in the board D35.

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the transmission effect display device TSG is installed on the back surface of the transparent plate D16 in front of the player of the pachinko gaming machine, and is synchronized with the pseudo continuous variation effect on the effect display device SG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured so as to be synchronized with the pre-reading effect. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a first modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 8 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, the changes from the second embodiment are step 1310-1 (second variation 1) to step 1310-4 (second variation 1), and step 1318-1 (second variation 1) to step 1318-. 4 (second variable 1), that is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M stores the first main game content determination random number in step 1308, the main control is performed in step 1310-1 (second variable 1). The CPUMC of the board M determines the temporarily stored failure random number separation information on the hold based on the suspension information (random number for success / failure lottery) (refer to the main game table 1 in FIG. 34 for the failure random number separation information). Next, in step 1310-2 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the stored symbol information stored based on the reservation information (the symbol random number for symbol lottery). Next, in step 1310-3 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the suspension information (variation mode determination random number), stores the stored variation mode random number separation information, non-short-time variation mode. The range and the time variation mode range are determined (refer to the main game table 3 of FIG. 35 for the variation mode random number delimiter information, the non-time variation mode range and the time variation mode range), and step 1310-4 (second variation 1) Migrate to Note that if the answer is No in step 1302 or 1304, the process proceeds to step 1310-4 (second variation 1). Next, in step 1310-4 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a hold generation command to the sub-control board S side (information indicating that the first main game is on hold, information on the number of holds). , A command relating to validity random number delimiter information, symbol information, variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1312.

  In step 1318, after the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores the second main game content determination random number, in step 1318-1 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the hold information ( Based on the random number for winning / failing lottery), the temporarily stored pending random number separator information is determined (refer to the main game table 1 in FIG. 34 for the successful random number separator information). Next, in step 1318-2 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the stored symbol information stored based on the reservation information (the symbol random number for symbol lottery). Next, in step 1318-3 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the suspension information (variation mode determination random number), stores the stored variation mode random number delimiter information, non-short-time variation mode. The range and the time variation mode range are determined (refer to the main game table 3 of FIG. 35 for the variation mode random number delimiter information, the non-time variation mode range and the time variation mode range), and step 1318-4 (second variation 1) Migrate to Note that if the answer is No in step 1312 or 1314, the process proceeds to step 1318-4 (second modification 1). Next, in step 1318-4 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a hold occurrence command to the sub-control board S side (information indicating that the second main game is held, information related to the number of holds). , A command related to validity random number delimiter information, symbol information, variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400).

  As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the variation mode random number is obtained when the main game content determination random number (the first main game content determination random number or the second main game content determination random number) is acquired (or when the suspension occurs). It is comprised so that division | segmentation information, a non-time-short variation aspect range, and a time-short variation aspect range may be determined.

  Here, the success / failure random number separation information is determined by the random number for success / failure lottery, and is separation information that divides the success / failure random numbers from 0 to 65535 into a plurality of random number ranges. The first primary game side and the second primary game side Both of them have three blocks, a failure block 1, a failure block 2, and a block 3, and the block is a big hit in the non-stochastic game state and a big hit in the probability game state. This is information, whether or not 2 is lost in the non-stochastic game state, and is a random number separator that is a big hit in the probability game, and the 3 is lost in the non-probability game state, and the probability This is random number delimiter information that is lost even in the floating game state.

  Next, FIG. 34 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game success lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success lottery table MN11ta-B) in the first modification from the second embodiment. It is. Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the hits that cannot be changed in the gaming state (so-called small hits) are not illustrated, but the small hits are generated (winning the small hits). Also good.

  First, the change from the second embodiment is configured such that the success / failure random number separation information is determined by the success / failure lottery random number. The corresponding random number delimiter information includes the first decisive delimiter information, the first main game side, and the second main game side, three determinants of deterministic determinant, deterministic determinant 2 and deterministic determinant 3. This is a random number separation information that is a big hit, and is a random number separation information that becomes a big hit even in the probability variation gaming state, and the failure decision 2 is a failure random number separation information that becomes a loss in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and a big hit in the probability variation gaming state The success / failure delimiter 3 is unacceptable random number delimiter information that is lost in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and also lost in the probability variation gaming state.

  Next, FIG. 34 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). In the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, when winning a big hit, one of a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “4A, 5A, 7A” and “4B, 5B, 7B”) is selected. The main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. Note that the number of rounds of special games determined with reference to the main game symbol is 8R for 4A, 4B, 5A, and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of variation mode (variation time), the selection rate, or the like.

  Here, the variation mode random number delimiter information is variable delimitation information that is determined by the variation mode determination random number and divides the variation mode determination random numbers from 0 to 65535 into a plurality of random number ranges. Are provided on the respective tables when the first main game side hits, the first main game side loses, the second main game side hits, and the second main game side loses. When the game side hits, the first main game side loses, and the second main game side loses, it is divided into five variable divisions from the variable division 1 to the variable division 5, and the second main game side At the time of hitting, it is divided into three variable delimiters from a variable delimiter 1 to a variable delimiter 3. Further, the non-short-time variation mode range is determined by a variation mode determination random number, and is variable delimiter information that divides the variation mode range in the non-time shortened state, and the short-time variation mode range is determined by a variation mode determination random number, It is fluctuation delimiter information that divides the fluctuation mode range in the time shortening state.

  Here, FIG. 35 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result and the main game short time flag state. It is configured as follows. That is, when the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result is a win, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game short flag is on (relative to the short game state) The variation mode in which the variation time is short is easily determined. This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of variation mode (variation time), the selection rate, or the like.

  As shown in the figure, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the variation mode random number delimiter information is determined by the variation mode determination random number. The variation mode random number delimiter information is provided in the respective tables when the first main game side hits, the first main game side loses, the second main game side hits, and the second main game side loses. It is divided into five variable breaks from 1 to 5 at the time of the first main game hit, the first main game lose, and the second main game lose. At the time of hitting on the second main game side, it is divided into three variable delimiters from variable delimiter 1 to variable delimiter 3. Further, the variation mode in which the variation time of the main game symbol is the shortest is determined to be a variation segment 1, and the variation mode in which the variation time of the main game symbol is the longest is determined to be a variation segment 3 or 5. Yes.

  Further, the random time range of the variation time and the variation mode range can be different (for example, the random number range is different even in the same range 1) by turning on / off the main game short time flag. By transmitting the delimiter information to the sub-control board S side, it is possible to derive both the variation modes of the time-saving game state and the non-time-saving game state on the sub-control board S side. Has been. In addition, the variation mode range is provided from the range 1 to the range 3. In addition, by configuring in this way, when the game state transitions between the occurrence of the hold and the digestion of the hold, the change mode range that was planned at the time of the hold occurrence and the change mode that is executed at the time of the hold digestion (For example, the change mode range was scheduled to be range 1 because it was a non-time-reduced gaming state when a hold occurred, but it was actually a time-reduced gaming state when the hold was digested. The variation mode range can be range 2.)

  Further, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the same variation mode range (for example, the range 1 when the main game short time flag is on and the main game short time flag are off by turning on and off the main game short time flag) Even in the case of the range 1, etc. in this case, the random number range included in the same variation mode range is configured to be different, and the variation mode random number separation information including only the different random number ranges (For example, there are a plurality of variation breaks when hitting the first main game variation mode determination table 2, etc.). Further, variation mode random number delimiter information (for example, the first main mode) consisting only of the range of random numbers included in both cases where the main game short time flag within the range of random numbers of the same variation mode range is on or off. There is also a change delimiter 1 at the time of hitting in the game change mode determination table. The number of types of variation mode random number delimiter information in each table (for example, five of variation delimiter 1 to variable delimiter 5) is based on the number of types of variation mode range (for example, three of range 1 to range 3). Is also configured to increase.

  Further, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the range 3 of the variation mode range is only the variation mode when the variation time that is the longest time that can be selected (120 seconds in this example) is scheduled. It is configured to be selected as a range. Therefore, when the range 3 in the variation mode range is selected, the expectation level that is the biggest jackpot is increased (the proportion of the variation mode that can be selected is increased). Further, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the range 3 is configured to be more easily selected in the non-time-reduced gaming state than in the time-reduced gaming state (the random number range is wide) {time During a shortened game state (especially during a time reduction / probability variation game state), it is possible to easily select a variation that results in a short variation time, thereby reducing the time required for the next big hit and reducing the game stress. it can.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the change from the second embodiment is step 2400 (second modification 1), that is, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the hold information management process in step 2400 (second modification 1). Thereafter, in step 2700, a decorative symbol display content determination process is executed.

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2400 (second modification 1) in FIG. 36 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2402-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new hold occurrence command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2402-2, in step 2402-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the drawing hold counter value (in this example, the maximum for the first main game and the maximum for the second main game are four). Add “1” to (4). Next, in step 2402-6, the CPUSC of the sub control board S obtains the hold information (particularly, the random number delimiter information, the symbol information, the variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) related to the hold occurrence command. Temporarily store in the RAM area.

  Next, in step 2450 (second variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a winning prefetch determination process described later. Next, in step 2402-8, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is information that indicates that the new hold is a trigger hold (step 2450 (second variable 1). ) Is determined whether or not the trigger has been put on hold in the pre-reading determination process at the time of winning. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that is won in the pre-read lottery at the time of winning or the pre-read lottery at the start of variation, and is a hold that triggers a pre-read effect described later. In the case of Yes in step 2402-8, in step 2550 (second variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a prefetch effect content determination process described later. Next, in Step 2403-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a transparency hold display effect availability lottery that is won by 1/3. Next, in step 2403-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the transparency hold display effect availability lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2403-2, a transparency hold display effect pattern is set based on the hold display mode determined in step 2403-3. Next, in step 2403-4, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command related to the execution timing of the transparency hold display effect based on the determined transparency hold display effect pattern {timing to execute the transparency hold display effect] (For example, at the start of the next change of the change for executing the prefetch effect)}, and the process proceeds to Step 2404-4.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2402-2, in step 2403-6, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new symbol variation display start command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2403-6, in step 2403-8, the CPUSC of the sub control board S subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter value. Next, in step 2404-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2404-4. Note that the process proceeds to step 2404-4 also in the case of No in step 2403-6 or step 2403-2.

  Next, in step 2404-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the same number of holdings as the drawing holding counter value on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first holding display unit SG12 and the second holding display unit SG13). The display lamp is turned on and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2700). In this example, the pre-reading determination can be executed at the time of the on-hold occurrence (at the time of winning a prize). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-read lottery is performed at the start of the main game symbol change or at other timing. May be configured to be executed.

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the prefetch determination process at the time of winning according to the subroutine of Step 2450 (second variation 1) of FIG. 37 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2451, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2451, in step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not the new hold is a hold on the second main game side. To do. If YES in step 2452, the process proceeds to step 2454. If No in step 2452, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2402-8).

  As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state, only the hold related to the second main game side can be the trigger hold related to the pre-reading effect, This is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. A hold on the first main game side that occurred during the time-reduced game state may also become a trigger hold, or during the non-time-reduced game, Only the hold on the main game side (or the hold on the second main game side) may be configured to be a trigger hold in the prefetch effect.

  Next, in step 2454, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads information relating to whether each hold is a trigger hold. Next, in step 2455, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether there is no trigger hold in the main game hold based on the read information. In the case of Yes in step 2455, in step 2456, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the change is a change related to the trigger suspension. In the case of Yes in step 2456, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a winning look-ahead lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/20). Note that the predetermined probability does not have to be 1/20, and by changing the predetermined probability, it is possible to adjust the degree of expectation that will be a big hit by the fluctuation that triggers the prefetching effect.

  Next, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold has won the prize pre-read lottery. In the case of Yes in step 2460, in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds information indicating “trigger hold” to the hold information related to the hold in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. And temporarily move to the next process (the process of step 2402-8). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2402-8) also in the case of No in step 2451, step 2455, step 2456, or step 2460. Note that the information indicating “trigger hold” added to the hold information is deleted when the hold information is deleted when the trigger hold is used.

  Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of prefetch effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second variation 1) in FIG. 37 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the trigger-pending correct / invalid random number delimiter information is the correct / invalid delimiter 1. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the display mode of the trigger hold as rainbow color (display mode for notifying the player that it will be decisive that it will be a big hit). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2403-1). As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when the validity / random number delimiter information of the trigger hold is the deterministic delimiter 1, that is, the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state or the non-probability variation gaming state. Regardless of whether or not it is a big hit, it is configured to execute a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the trigger hold to a rainbow color as a specific prefetch effect. In the present embodiment, the specific prefetch effect is executed on condition that the pass / fail random number delimiter information is the pass / fail delimiter 1. However, the execution condition of the specific prefetch effect is limited to this. Alternatively, a plurality of conditions may be combined, such as executing on condition that the random number delimiter information is true / false delimiter 1 and the variation mode random number delimiter information is variable delimiter 5.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2552, in other words, if the failure random number delimiter information of the trigger suspension is the failure determination 2 or 3, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S It is determined whether or not the variable delimiter is 1 or 2. In the case of Yes in step 2556, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the display mode of the trigger hold with reference to the hold display mode determination table A, and performs the next process (the process of step 2402-9). Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, when the variation mode delimitation information of the trigger hold is the variation delimiter 3 or 4 or 5, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the display mode of the trigger hold. It decides with reference to the hold display mode decision table B, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2403-1).

  Here, the two tables in the lower part of FIG. In the first modification from the second embodiment, the trigger hold display mode that can change when the hold change effect is executed can be selected with reference to the hold display mode determination table A or the hold display mode determination table B. There are three types of display modes: red, green, and blue, and lottery is performed using a random number dedicated to determining the hold display mode. When referring to the hold display mode determination table A, the blue color is most easily selected. On the other hand, when referring to the hold display mode determination table B, red and green are most easily selected, and the hold change effect is generated. The big hit expectation degree for each display mode of holding is in the order of red, green, and blue in descending order of expectation. Note that the display mode that can be changed is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the number of types is changed or the color that can be changed is changed.

  As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed, the big hit expectation can be different depending on the display mode selected from the plural types of hold display modes. At the same time, there are a plurality of types of backgrounds that can be changed as background change effects (effects that can be displayed on the effect display device SG and can be changed based on the game state and the hold information), and a background that is selected when the effect is executed. You may comprise so that a jackpot expectation degree may differ with kinds of.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a transparency hold display effect image diagram in the first modification from the second embodiment. In this example, similarly to the second embodiment, when viewed from the player side, the transmissive effect display device TSG (transparent plate back surface) and the effect display device SG are provided in this order from the front. First, the display area (area surrounded by dotted lines) of the effect display device SG and the transmissive effect display device TSG in the front view of the lower left pachinko gaming machine is expanded, and the aspect of the effect is shown in time series in the upper stage It was. First, in the upper left figure, the upper left display indicates the current number of holds, and the hold display imitating a crystal ball indicates “trigger hold”. First, at the start of a certain fluctuation, a trigger suspension occurs on the effect display device SG, and the symbols “4”, “5”, and “7” from the left are stopped as decorative symbols. Nothing is displayed on the transmission effect display device TSG. Next, when the next change starts, the leftmost hold is digested, and “trigger hold” is displayed in the second shift from the left, and at the same time, overlaps the display of “trigger hold” as a transparent hold display effect. In the area on the transparency effect display device TSG, a plurality of light emitting areas around the crystal ball repeats blinking, thereby displaying “a glittering effect”. The execution timing of the transparency hold display effect is the timing determined in step 2403-4. In this example, the timing is determined to be the next change after the change in which the trigger hold has occurred. Next, when the next change is started, the display of “trigger hold” is shifted to the left end, and the “shining effect” of the area on the transparent effect display device TSG is overlapped with the shift display. "Is also shifted and the range of the" shining effect "and the number of flashing light emitting areas are increased, and the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is greatly projected.

  Next, when the next change is started, the display of “trigger hold” and the display of “shining effect” disappears because it is reserved, the “3” symbol stops to the left and right, and the reach effect is Be started. Thereafter, the symbol “3” is also stopped at the center of the row, and then the special game is started. In this example, the effect is executed in the area of the transmissive effect display device TSG that overlaps the hold on the effect display device SG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is also synchronized with the hold change on the decorative symbol. You may comprise so that the produced effect can be performed (for example, the effect that the blinking range of the light emission area which concerns on a "shining effect" moves ahead of a decoration design). In addition, the timing of the effect execution of the transparency hold display is not limited to the timing of the hold-up, and when the pattern is changing, when the hold occurs, or when the hold display of the effect display device SG is not “trigger hold”. Even if it exists, you may comprise so that it can perform. Further, the hold display is not limited to the display on the effect display device SG, and may be performed only on the transmissive effect display device TSG (for example, the hold display of the effect display device SG disappears from the middle of the effect, Shift to display on the transparency effect display device TSG).

  Further, the display change on the effect display device SG, the lamp lighting on the transmissive effect display device TSG (effect display), and the display change on the effect display device SG + the lamp lighting on the transmissive effect display device TSG (effect display). ) Depending on the mode of change of hold, the jackpot expectation may be different, or the display mode on the display device SG may be changed according to the mode of display on the display device SG. For example, for a normal hold display, an effect display by color change is performed, and for a diamond-type hold display, an effect display by lamp lighting is executed by the transmissive effect display device TSG).

  According to the transmission effect display device TSG, the effect display is performed in the area overlapping the entire transparent plate D16 (that is, the area overlapping with all members such as the game area D30, the game effect (decoration) lamp D26, the movable body accessory YK, etc.). Since it is possible, various productions can be performed. On the other hand, it is good also as installing not only the whole surface of the transparent plate D16 but only the periphery. On the game board D35, the brightness of the game area D30 is lowered in a portion where it is difficult to install the LED, and the visibility of a fixed accessory or the like may be poor (underframe lamp etc. To illuminate the light forward (towards the player)). As an auxiliary illumination in such a case, it may be configured to exhibit a function of irradiating the game board D35. In addition, in the area overlapping the periphery of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) display device and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) hold display unit, the transmissive effect display device TSG is not installed. It can also be configured. Further, in the second embodiment, the transmissive effect display device TSG is installed on the back surface of the transparent plate D16. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect display device SG, the center decoration D38, and the game effect lamp D26. A similar synergistic effect may be executed by installing the transmissive effect display device TSG as a decoration (protection) cover member DC of a member that can be rendered by lighting (displaying) or the like.

  Next, FIG. 41 is an image diagram of a transparent right-handed instruction display in this example. In this example, when viewed from the player side, the transparent effect display device TSG (transparent plate back surface), the movable body accessory YK, and the effect display device SG are provided in this order from the front. First, the lower left figure is a schematic diagram of the front of the pachinko gaming machine, in which the effect display device SG is arranged in the center of the game board D35, and the transmissive effect display device TSG is installed in the area surrounded by the dotted line. It has become. The upper right figure shows an enlarged display area of the transmission effect display device TSG. On the effect display device SG at the center of the panel, “7” symbols are arranged as stop symbols for the decorative symbols, and the movable body accessory YK is engaged at the center to form a heart shape. Next, when the special game is started, the movable body accessory YK moves to the initial position (a position separated from the game board D35), and on the right side (or left side) of the game board D35 on the transmissive effect display device TSG. As a message for instructing to fire the game ball, the message “Aim at the right” (or “Aim at the left”) and an arrow indicating the flow path for the game ball to flow down are both displayed large. Is done. At this time, since the transmission effect display device TSG is installed on the back side of the transparent plate D16 closest to the player, the movable body accessory YK, the effect display device SG, the center decoration D38, the game effect lamp D26, and the like. Regardless of the arrangement of the fixed combination (for example, a character or the like, not shown), the display is configured so that the player can visually recognize (easily visually recognize). The display mode on the transmissive effect display device TSG in this case is not particularly limited as in the case of the other embodiments, regardless of whether it has transparency, dot display, video display, etc. Anything that can be displayed is acceptable. In addition, when it is fired in the right channel (left channel) (for example, entering a predetermined number of game balls into the entrance that is easy to enter when left-handed and difficult to enter when right-handed If the color display is changed, or if it is not fired in the right channel (left channel) (in the case of an illegal game), the color is changed to call attention. It may be configured. Note that the transmissive effect display device TSG may be installed in the protective cover (decorative cover member DC) of the effect display device SG. In this case, even if the movable body accessory YK is installed inside the protective cover (decorative cover member DC), the right-handed permeation instruction display (or permeation left-handed instruction display) is performed by driving the movable body accessory YK. Is not difficult to see.

  Next, FIG. 42 is an image diagram of a transmissive drum effect in this example. In this example, when viewed from the player side, the transparent effect display device TSG (the back surface of the transparent plate D16) and the mechanical drum DM are provided in this order from the front. Here, the drum DM is a rotary drum having a configuration similar to that of the reel M50 of the rotary type gaming machine. First, the display area (area surrounded by the dotted line) of the transmission effect display device TSG in the schematic diagram of the front of the pachinko gaming machine on the lower left of the figure is enlarged, and the aspect of the effects in time series from the upper left figure Indicated. In this example, a mechanical drum device is provided, and the transmissive effect display device TSG is installed so as to overlap an area where the effect of the drum DM is recognized. In the upper left figure, the symbol “7” stops on the lower left reel and the upper right reel on the drum, and reach. Next, “flame” is displayed as an effect display in the area of the transmissive effect display device TSG that overlaps the stopped “7” symbol on the drum DM. Furthermore, “flame” is displayed as an effect display on the transmission effect display device TSG in front of the middle reel, and an effect that the expectation level for jackpot is higher is executed. Next, the “7” symbol is also stopped at the middle reel middle stage, and the “7” symbol is aligned as the decorative symbol stop symbol, and the “7” symbol on the drum DM is transparent as viewed from the player. “Sun” is displayed as an effect display in the area of the effect display device TSG, and then a special game is started.

  In this example, the transparent effect display device TSG is provided on the back surface of the transparent plate D16 in front of the drum DM. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the structure is provided with the transparency effect display device TSG on the surface of the reel band. Alternatively, the transparent effect display device TSG may be provided on the surface of the cover member (decorative cover member DC) of the mechanical drum device. In addition, when applying a transmissive effect display apparatus to a reel band, you may comprise so that electric power may be supplied by the contact of a slip ring. In addition to the case where the transparent effect display device TSG is installed on the entire front surface of the reel so as to be able to display as in this example, a part (for example, between the reels and the reels, both ends, etc., the symbols on the drum DM are visually recognized). It is also possible to install it so that the production is displayed only in a place that does not interfere with the performance.Other productions include production that announces the tempe line (for example, the degree of expectation is indicated by the color), winning line, winning design In addition, the reel (drum) back lamp is turned off during the period of the notice effect before the drum stops moving, and a notice effect like a shooting star (meteor shower) is displayed. It may be configured such that an effect that is executed or synchronized with the driving mode of the reel can be executed on the transparency effect display device TSG.

<Circular machine>
Next, the swivel type gaming machine according to the present example will be described with reference to the third to fourth embodiments.

(Third embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the feature (outline) of the rotary type gaming machine P according to the third embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, with reference to FIG. 43 (FIG. 44 for a part of the configuration), the basic structure of the front side of the rotary type gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be described. First of all, the swing type gaming machine P mainly includes a front door (also referred to as a front door), a back box (also referred to as a cabinet and a base body), a reel unit installed in the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit, a main control. A substrate M (a substrate on which the main control chip C including the CPUMC is mounted) and a sub control substrate S (a substrate on which the sub control chip SC including the CPUSC is mounted) are configured. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  Next, the front door DU of the swing type gaming machine P includes a decorative lamp unit D150 and a medal tray D230. First, the decorative lamp unit D150 has a light-emitting source that emits light in accordance with the progress of the game of the rotary game machine P. Further, a door switch D80 capable of detecting the open / closed state of the front door DU is provided. Further, the front door DU is provided with a key hole D260, and a key (door key) that matches the shape of the key hole D260 is inserted into the key hole D260 {in addition, twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)} The front door DU can be opened. Furthermore, in the third embodiment, an error state (such as a door opening error) can be canceled by inserting a door key into the keyhole D260 {plus twisting in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}. ing. Next, the medal tray D230 is a tray for game medals (or simply called medals) released from the discharge port D240.

  Next, the front door DU includes a mechanism for enabling visual recognition of the game state, a mechanism for enabling input of game media, a mechanism for operating the reel unit, and the like. Specifically, the reel window D160, the insertion number display lamp D210, the operation state display lamp D180, the special game state display apparatus D250, the credit number display apparatus D200, and the payout number display apparatus are provided as mechanisms for making the gaming state visible. (Push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as push order display device D270), AT counter value display device D280, and the like are attached. Further, as a mechanism for enabling the insertion of game media and inputting the number of bets (the number of bets), a medal insertion slot D170, a bet button D220, and a mechanism for enabling the payout of the inserted game media are settled. Button D60 is attached. As a mechanism for operating the reel, a start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached. In addition, an operation console D190 is provided that protrudes to the player side to which a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub input button SB, and the like are attached. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail. Here, the sub input button SB is a member used for a button repeated striking effect, which will be described later, and a mini game (for example, an effect of success or failure of entering the “AT state”) by the player's operation of the sub input button. It is the member comprised so that progress of these etc. could be performed.

<Mechanism to make game state visible>
Next, the reel window D160 is a transparent member formed of a synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be seen through the reel window D160. ing. In addition, the insertion number indicator lamp D210 is constituted by an LED, and is configured so that the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (to insert a game medal necessary for starting one game) are lit. Has been. Further, the operation state indicator lamp D180 is configured by an LED and is configured to be turned on / off according to the current operation state (medal acceptance / non-acceptance state, re-game stop state, game start wait state, etc.). The special game state display device D250 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. The special game state display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a case, the total number of payouts is displayed on the effect display device SG (also referred to as a second information display unit). By configuring so, the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. The payout amount display device (push order display device) D270 is configured by a 7-segment display, and the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button) D43 is a condition device (so-called pushing order (also called a role with pushing order) that can be won depending on the order in which the winning combination is given). In a game in which a profit rate (the number of payouts, the subsequent RT state, etc.) attached to a player is generally different} is established, the reel stop order that is most advantageous to the player is determined. It is comprised so that it can alert | report (the said alerting | reporting may be called push order navigation). Thus, the payout amount display device (push order display device) D270 is configured to be able to execute two displays of the number of game medals currently being paid out and the reel stop order that provides the highest profit to the player. The display mode is such that the player does not misunderstand which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. The credit amount display device D200 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (credit number) stored in the gaming machine as medals held by the player. Further, the AT counter value display device D280 plays games according to the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as a first information display unit) among the states related to AT (details will be described later). It is configured to be able to display the number of games that can stay in a state related to AT that is advantageous for the player to be guaranteed when progressing (in this example, it is referred to as a push order navigation state and will be described in detail later). Yes. Note that the AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided. In such a configuration, the player can be configured to display the number of games that can stay in the AT state on the effect display device SG. Can recognize the number of games in which the state related to the advantageous AT is guaranteed and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. The payout number display device (push order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices: a payout number display device and a push order display device.

<Mechanism to enable input of game media>
Next, the medal slot D170 is a slot for game medals, and the game medal inserted into the slot is guided to the inside of the gaming machine in a situation where medals can be received. Also, an insertion acceptance sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s are provided in the gaming machine as sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, and are guided into the gaming machine. When it is determined that a game medal has been inserted normally, the inserted medal can be detected as a bet. The bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to bet a stored medal (credit medal) by the operation. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and the stored medal (credit medal) and / or bet medal can be paid back to the player by the operation. Yes. Note that the game medals paid out by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating the reel>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to start the reel operation by the operation. The stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player. The operation of the reels can be stopped sequentially by operating the respective stop buttons. Has been.

  Next, the reel unit of the rotating type gaming machine P includes a reel M50 and a drive source (stepping motor or the like) of the reel M50. The reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel part is formed of a synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of symbols are drawn on the outer periphery of the reel part (on the reel band). And based on operation of each stop button in the start lever D50 and the stop button D40, it is comprised so that rotation operation and stop operation | movement of each reel part are enabled. Although not shown, an LED (hereinafter also referred to as a reel backlight) is provided inside the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and when the LED is lit, the outer periphery of the reel portion is provided. It is configured so that it can be visually recognized as if the outer periphery of the reel portion is lit by the light transmitted through.

<Other mechanisms>
In addition, inside and outside the gaming machine of the swing type gaming machine P, an effect display device SG and a transparency effect display device for displaying effects such as a notice effect and a background effect as a mechanism for enhancing the interest of the game. TSG, LED lamp S10 that can be lit in various lighting modes, speaker S20 that can output sound, middle panel D110 (medium decorative panel), upper panel D130, and lower panel D140 that are members formed of synthetic resin or the like , Etc. are provided. The middle panel D110 is a part on the upper side of the console D190 and a lower side of the upper panel D130, and is a panel part including a reel window. Also, the insertion number display lamp D210, the operation state display lamp D180, the special game state display apparatus D250, the credit number display apparatus D200, the payout number display apparatus (push order display apparatus) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push order display apparatus D270). An AT counter value display device D280 or the like may be provided.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing an internal configuration of the rotating type gaming machine P with the front door DU opened. The effect display device SG is attached to the upper part on the back side of the front door DU. A reel window D160 is provided substantially at the center of the front door DU, and a door substrate D described later is provided below the reel window D160. In addition, the door board D receives input signals such as the stop button D40, the start lever D50, and the settlement button D60 described above. A speaker S20 is provided below the door substrate D.

  Although details will be described later, an insertion acceptance sensor D10s serving as a path for game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 is provided in the vicinity of the door substrate D, and a game is provided below the insertion reception sensor D10s. A coin shooter D90 and the like for guiding the medal to the discharge port D240 are provided. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on dimensions, and accepting only game medals that conform to the standard dimensions. The selected medal (or other foreign matter) is returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. If the player inserts a game medal before operating the start lever D50 (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is valid), the game medal is selected by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, and only those satisfying the standard are selected. A medal that does not satisfy the standard and is inserted into the hopper H40 is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, when a game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is not valid), regardless of whether the standard is satisfied, the inserted game medal Is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. In addition, a sensor for medal insertion, which will be described in detail later, is provided inside the insertion acceptance sensor D10s (the back of the flow path), and when a game medal that has been received satisfying the dimensional standard passes, the first insertion sensor D20s. The signal is detected by the second input sensor D30s and the signal is supplied to the main control board M to be described later.

  A main control board M, which will be described later, that controls the entire game is stored above the reel M50, and behind the reel M50, each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is driven. For this purpose, a later-described rotor substrate K is stored. Further, on the left side of the reel M50, a sub-control board, which will be described later, that controls various effects performed using the effect display device SG, the transmissive effect display device TSG, the LED lamp S10, the speaker S20, etc. shown in FIG. S is stored. In addition, the main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting / reset that can execute setting value change, error cancellation, and the like. A setting door switch M10 for determining opening / closing of a setting door (not shown) for protecting the button M30, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, and the like is connected. The setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, and the setting door switch M10 are not shown, but they may be provided at appropriate positions on the main control board M (ie, the front door). If the DU is not opened, it may be in a position where it is difficult to access artificially).

  Below the reel M50, there are provided a hopper H40 for collecting inserted game medals and a medal payout device H for paying out game medals, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire revolving game machine P E is stored. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H pass through the coin shooter D90 and are paid out from the discharge port D240. Further, on the front surface of the power supply board E, there is also provided a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the swivel type gaming machine P.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing a path (selector) of game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 inside the spinning cylinder type gaming machine. A game medal inserted into the medal slot D170 first passes through the slot acceptance sensor D10s. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when the game medal passes, it turns on when the two protruding mechanisms are pressed, and the game medal can normally pass through the passage. . Also, with such a configuration, when a foreign object that is not a game medal (for example, one having a smaller diameter than the game medal) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms are not pressed. Such medals cannot be maintained in the standing state, and therefore cannot pass through the passage (the medals fall down) and are paid back to the discharge port D240. In addition, the insertion acceptance sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine that there is an error even when the on-time continues for a predetermined time or longer (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off). .

  When the game medal normally passes through the blocker D100, it passes through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s immediately after passing. The throwing sensors (first throwing sensor D20s and second throwing sensor D30s) are composed of two sensors (adjacently arranged at an interval smaller than the standard diameter of the game medal), and each sensor is turned on. -Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off-state (the order of transition of the on / off combination of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, etc.) and the on / off time. It is configured.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device H in the rotating type gaming machine P. The medal payout device H is operated with the checkout button in the state where credits (game medals stored electronically inside the gaming machine) or bets (medals inserted to start the game) exist. It is activated when a game medal is paid out by winning or winning. In operation, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 about the disk rotation axis H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H are displaced from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240 by displacing the discharge urging means H70. The payout sensors (the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s) are composed of two sensors, and the ON / OFF status of each sensor (the ON / OFF state of the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s). It is configured to detect various errors by monitoring the order of transition of the combination of off, etc.) and the time of on / off. More specifically, for example, when the game medal outlet H60 normally passes, the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off due to the displacement of the discharge biasing means H70. 1 payout sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on / second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on / second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout Sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = off, so that when a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected It is possible to exemplify the configuration of an error.

  Next, FIG. 47 is a list of basic specifications of the swivel type gaming machine in the third embodiment. The swivel type gaming machine according to the third embodiment has a prescribed number (the maximum number of game medals that can be bet in one game) of three, and the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are all 20. The valid line for which the frame and winning determination is made is one line of “lower left reel M51, middle reel M52 middle, upper right reel M53”, the maximum payout number is 7, and the minimum payout number is 1 (the winning combination and the payout number) The bonus symbol is “Sheep / Sheep / Sheep” (finished with a payout of more than 450), and the first type BB (a so-called first type special accessory continuous operating device) It has become. In addition, the order of priority winning (in order of drawing-in priority) is “re-playing role → small role (bell, watermelon, etc.) → bonus”. For example, when the re-playing role and bonus are established at the same time The symbol combination which becomes the re-game player is stopped and displayed, and the bonus cannot be won. Also, when the bell and watermelon are established, if a stop button is pressed at a position where both can be retracted (positions within 4 frames to the winning stop position), priority is given to a small part with a large number of payouts. It is configured to retract. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and the number of frames of each reel is changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of the effective line is changed (for example, 5 lines of 3 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if it is changed to line). In addition, as a pull-in control when a push order small role that gives different profits to the player depending on the push order is won, a small role with a large number of payouts is operated when operated in a predetermined correct push order. Is given priority (number priority control), and can be displayed in a stop position (within 4 frames from the stop operation) when operated in an incorrect answer push order different from the correct answer push order. Among the symbols arranged), control (number priority control) is performed to increase the possibility of winning (the number of winning combinations among the plurality of winning symbol combinations is the highest).

  Next, FIG. 48 is a list of reel arrangements of the rotating type gaming machine P in the third embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames (0 to 19), and the symbols are “Seven”, “Sheep”, “Blank B”. ”,“ Bell ”,“ Replay A ”,“ Replay B ”,“ Watermelon A ”,“ Watermelon B ”,“ Cherry ”, and“ Blank A ”. Here, “Blank A” and “Blank B” are symbols included in the symbol combination that constitutes the winning combination in the same manner as other symbols, and do not mean the symbol that does not constitute the winning combination, but “blank A”. As a combination of symbols constituting a winning combination including, for example, “Watermelon B / Replay A / Blank A” is a replay 03, and as a symbol combination configuring a winning combination including “Blank B”, for example, It is replay 03 with "Watermelon B / Replay A / Blank B". The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type of design is increased / decreased / changed.

  Next, FIGS. 49 to 52 are symbol combination lists 1 to 4 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device. Any one of the symbol combinations is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (the one line described above). In addition, even if the same type of symbols is not available on the active line, the same symbols are easily arranged in a line on the lines other than the active line when viewed from the player. It is configured so that three watermelon symbols are aligned on one line on the reel, such as aligned on a horizontal line).

  Next, FIGS. 53 to 57 are condition device lists 1 to 5 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, re-playing roles are provided from re-playing-A to re-playing H3 (conditional device numbers 1 to 22), and the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53. Depending on the situation, the re-gamer to be stopped and displayed can be different. The condition device number may be referred to as a winning number. The item “push order etc.” describes the types of re-game players that are stopped and displayed in the stop order, for example, “left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3”. "123" means that the operation is stopped in the pressing order of "left reel M51-> middle reel M52-> right reel M53". For example, "replay C-1" (condition device number 7) In this case, when the stop is performed in the order of “123” = “left → middle → right”, the symbol combination “replay 06” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when the order is stopped in the order of “left → right → middle”, the symbol combination “replay 04” is stopped and displayed, and if the middle first stop is performed, regardless of the types of reels of the second stop and the third stop When the symbol combination “replay 04” is stopped and displayed, and the right first stop is performed, the symbol combination “replay 03” is stopped and displayed regardless of the types of reels of the second stop and the third stop. It becomes. By configuring in this way, if the correct answer can be made in the push order, the gaming state (state related to AT or RT state) is promoted (transition to a gaming state that is highly profitable for the player), or if the correct answer cannot be made in the push order, the gaming state (related to AT) It is possible to create a game such that the state or the RT state) falls (shifts to a gaming state having a low profit for the player). Further, in the case of “winning-A1 (bell)” (condition device number 23), “123” = “left → middle → right” is stopped in this order, that is, when the correct answer is given in the pressing order, seven payouts are obtained. It is configured so that it is stopped in the other pressing order, that is, if one cannot answer correctly in the pressing order, it is configured to pay out one sheet. By configuring in this way, it is related to ATs such as “AT in progress” and “AT in preparation” The navigation order of the re-game player and the pushing order of the bell are navigated in the state (the pushing order with the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), and the ATs such as “normal gaming state” and “AT precursor state” It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states in which the player's profit rate is different from pushing the navigation order to the state. The state related to AT will be described later. In the case of “winning-E1” (condition device number 42), “123” = “left → middle → right” is stopped in this order, that is, if the correct answer is given in the order of pushing, three payouts will be made, and other pushes Even when stopped in order, that is, when the correct answer cannot be made in the order of pushing, the payout of 3 sheets is made with a probability of 1/4. Further, the specific symbol is stopped (configured so that no medal is paid out) in 3/4 when the correct answer cannot be made. Here, “the specific symbol is stopped” means that the symbol combination that triggers the transition to the RT state is stopped (displayed). In the third embodiment, as described in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 75 to be described later, when a specific symbol is stopped at “RT0”, “RT2”, “RT3”, it is configured to shift to “RT1”. ing.

  Next, FIG. 58 shows a lottery probability (also referred to as a winning rate) in which a condition device number (winning number, also referred to as a winning combination) relating to a small combination and a re-playing combination in the third embodiment is determined by a winning lottery means. It is a list to show. In the figure, the winning rate of the condition device number is illustrated. For example, in the case of “winning-E1”, the specific symbol can be stopped, but the probability that the specific symbol actually stops is It does not stop at the indicated probability (80/65536), and in a situation where push order navigation does not occur, it does not answer correctly in the order of the three choices that the three-piece combination will win, and a specific operation If the operation is not performed at the timing, the specific symbol is stopped, and in a situation where push order navigation can occur, if the reel is stopped according to the push order navigation, the three-piece combination will always win a prize. . Specifically, for example, in a situation where the condition device number 42 corresponding to “winning-E1” is determined, (1) when the left stop button D41 is operated in the first stop operation, winning 09 to winning If any three of 12 winning combinations win (2-1) the middle stop button D42 is operated in the first stop operation, the bell symbol stops on the middle reel, and (2-2) the second 2 When the left reel is stopped by the stop operation, either watermelon A or watermelon B (the watermelon pattern constituting the winning prize 13 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) is stopped according to the stop operation timing. (2-3) When the right reel is stopped by the third stop operation, the seven symbols (the seven symbols constituting the winning prize 13 within 4 frames after the stop operation is received) are stopped and displayed according to the stop operation timing. And when When operated in a stop operation timing can not stop displaying the emission pattern (operation timing other than seven symbol watermelon A~ symbol number 8 symbol number 4 in the upper part of the right reel) stops displaying the replay A. For this reason, the specific symbol 02 shown in FIG. 52 is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the middle stop button D42 is operated in the (3-1) first stop operation, the bell symbol is stopped on the middle reel, and (3-2) the right reel is stopped in the second stop operation. In this case, the seven symbols (the seven symbols constituting the winning prize 13 within 4 frames after the stop operation is received) are stopped and displayed depending on the stop operation timing, and the stop operation timing (right reel) where the seven symbols cannot be stopped and displayed. In the upper stage, when the operation is performed at a timing other than the watermelon A of the symbol number 4 to the seven symbol of the symbol number 8, the replay A is stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the left reel is stopped by the third stop operation, depending on the stop operation timing, watermelon A or watermelon B (the watermelon symbol constituting the winning prize 13 within 4 frames after the stop operation is received) Either of the above is stopped. For this reason, the specific symbol 02 shown in FIG. 52 is stopped and displayed. Thus, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, the right reel is operated at a specific operation timing (the operation timing of the symbol No. 4 watermelon A to symbol No. 8 Seven symbol on the upper stage of the reel). Since the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 13 is configured to be stopped and displayed, the winning probability of the winning 13 is 5/20 (1/4). In addition, if the right reel is operated at a timing other than a specific operation timing (operation timing of watermelon A of symbol number 4 to symbol number 8 on the upper part of the reel), it is not a symbol combination corresponding to winning 13 but a symbol combination. Since the symbol combination corresponding to the symbol is configured to be stopped and displayed, the stop display probability of the specific symbol is 15/20 (3/4).

  Similarly, (4-1) when the right stop button D43 is operated in the first stop operation, the bell symbol is stopped on the right reel, and (4-2) the left reel is stopped in the second stop operation. In the event of a stop operation, either the sheep, watermelon A or watermelon B (the symbol constituting the winning prize 13 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) is stopped, and (4-3) the third stop When the middle reel is stopped by the operation, the blank symbol B (the blank symbol B constituting the winning prize 17 within four frames after the stop operation is received) is stopped and displayed depending on the stop operation timing. Stop operation timing at which symbol B cannot be stopped (operation time other than symbol No. 18 sheep, symbol No. 19 replay A, symbol No. 0 cherry to symbol No. 2 blank B symbol in the middle reel) When operated in grayed) stops displaying the cherry symbol. For this reason, the specific symbol 03 described in FIG. 57 is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the right stop button D43 is operated in the (5-1) first stop operation, the bell symbol is stopped on the right reel, and (5-2) the middle reel is stopped in the second stop operation. In this case, when the blank symbol B (blank symbol B constituting the winning prize 17 within 4 frames after the stop operation is received) is stopped and displayed by the stop operation timing, and when the blank symbol B cannot be stopped and displayed. If the operation is performed in the middle of the middle reel (designation number 18 sheep, design number 19 replay A, design number 0 cherry to design number 2 blank B design timing), the cherry design is stopped. (5-3) When the left reel is stopped by the third stop operation, sheep or watermelon A or watermelon B (four frames after the stop operation is received) depending on the stop operation timing. One of symbols) constituting the winning 13 to stop display located within. For this reason, the specific symbol 03 described in FIG. 57 is stopped and displayed. As a result, when the first stop operation is the right reel, the middle reel has a specific operation timing (middle of the middle reel, symbol number 18 sheep, symbol number 19 replay A, symbol number 0 cherry to symbol number 2). When the operation is performed at an operation timing other than the blank B symbol), the winning combination probability of winning 17 is 5/20 (1 / 4). In addition, the middle reel is operated at a specific operation timing (operation timing other than symbol No. 18 sheep, symbol No. 19 replay A, symbol No. 0 cherry to symbol No. 2 blank B symbol in the middle stage of the middle reel). In such a case, the symbol combination corresponding to the specific symbol is stopped and displayed instead of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 17, so that the stop display probability of the specific symbol is 15/20 (3/4). It becomes. Although the stop display of the specific symbol when “winning-E1” is determined as the conditional device number has been described, the probability that this specific symbol is stopped is also the same for “winning-E2” to “winning-E6”. It has been calculated.

  For example, when the condition device number 43 corresponding to “winning-E2” is determined and the first stop operation is the middle reel, the timing (1/4) when the sheep symbol is stopped and displayed on the right reel. When operated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 14 is stopped and displayed, and at the other operation timing (3/4), the specific symbol 02 or the specific symbol 03 is stopped and displayed. In the situation where the condition device number of “Winning-E2” is determined, when the first stop operation is the right reel, the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) at which the watermelon A is stopped and displayed on the middle reel. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 18 is stopped and displayed, and the specific symbol 03 is stopped and displayed at the other operation timing (3/4).

  Further, in a situation where the condition device number 44 corresponding to “winning-E3” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the timing when the blank B is stopped and displayed on the middle reel (1/4). When operated, the symbol combination corresponding to winning 09 is stopped and displayed, and at the other operation timing (3/4), the specific symbol 01 is stopped and displayed. In the situation where the condition device number of “Winning-E3” is determined, when the first stop operation is the right reel, the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) at which the watermelon B is stopped and displayed on the middle reel. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning 19 is stopped and displayed, and the specific symbol 03 is stopped and displayed at the other operation timing (3/4).

  Further, in a situation where the condition device number 45 corresponding to “winning-E4” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the timing (1/4) at which the watermelon A is stopped and displayed on the middle reel. When operated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 10 is stopped and displayed, and at the other operation timing (3/4), the specific symbol 01 is stopped and displayed. In the situation where the condition device number of “winning-E4” is determined, when the first stop operation is the right reel, the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) at which the blank A is stopped and displayed on the middle reel. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning 20 is stopped and displayed, and the specific symbol 03 is stopped and displayed at the other operation timing (3/4).

  Further, in a situation where the condition device number 46 corresponding to “winning-E5” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the timing (1/4) at which the watermelon B is stopped and displayed on the middle reel. When operated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 11 is stopped and displayed, and the specific symbol 01 is stopped and displayed at the other operation timing (3/4). In the situation where the condition device number of “winning-E5” is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) when the blank A is stopped and displayed on the right reel. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 15 is stopped and displayed, and the specific symbol 02 is stopped and displayed at the other operation timing (3/4).

  Also, in the situation where the condition device number 47 corresponding to “winning-E6” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the timing when the blank A is stopped and displayed on the middle reel (1/4) When operated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 12 is stopped and displayed, and the specific symbol 01 is stopped and displayed at the other operation timing (3/4). In the situation where the condition device number of “Winning-E6” is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) when the blank B is stopped and displayed on the right reel. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning 16 is stopped and displayed, and the specific symbol 02 is stopped and displayed at the other operation timing (3/4).

  In the third embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of the winning combination (especially the replaying combination) can be different depending on the RT state. The total appearance rate) is higher in the case of “RT3” than in the other RT states. In addition, “re-game 03, 04” that can be stopped and displayed in the condition device numbers 7 to 14 (so-called falling re-game players, the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game players is stopped in a situation where bonuses are not won. When displayed, the normal gaming state ("RT1") will be selected mainly at "RT3" and hardly appear in other RT states. In addition, “re-game 05” that can be stopped and displayed in the condition device numbers 2 to 6 (the promoted re-game that will be promoted to “RT 2” when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game player is stopped and displayed in RT1. The role) is configured to appear only at “RT1”. In addition, if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed on “RT2”, the promotion that will be promoted to “RT3” can be stopped and displayed on the condition device numbers 7 to 11 The “re-game player” is mainly won at “RT2” and hardly appears in other RT states. Note that the transition of the state relating to the RT state and AT associated with the stop display of the symbol combination serving as the re-gamer will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in the third embodiment, the push order navigation device that informs the player of the reel stop order that is most advantageous to the player can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device SG. If the reels are not stopped according to the push order navigation, the lottery probability of the winning combination to win will be different from the value shown in the figure {for example, “RT1” and no push order navigation occurs In the “normal game state” or the like, the probability that the bell (7-card combination) is stopped and displayed is lower than the illustrated probability. } There is no problem even if the lottery probability is appropriately changed. In the third embodiment, the bonus is configured to overlap with the small role, and overlaps with a part of the weak watermelon, the strong watermelon, the strong chance eye, etc. (for example, a part of the strong watermelon) Is “bonus + strong watermelon” and is configured to win “single strong watermelon” at 130/65536 and “bonus + strong watermelon” at 30/65536). Note that the weak watermelon with the condition device number 48 overlaps with the bonus number 20, the strong watermelon with the condition device number 49 has the placement number 30, and the strong chance with the condition device number 50 has the overlap of the placement number 10 with the bonus. In addition, the small role probability shown in the figure is a probability when the BB is not activated, and when the BB is activated, the seven (for example, the seven symbols can be stopped and displayed) with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100). (Re-playing role) is won, and all others are configured to win “Winning-I” (special role in RB). Note that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the watermelon (small role), and may overlap with a part of the re-game. For example, a part of the strong cherry (replaying combination) of the condition device number 16 or all of the strong cherries (replaying combination) may overlap with the bonus combination (in the third embodiment, depending on the RT state). The number 2 is the same as the bonus combination). Moreover, it may overlap with a part of RT transition replays (replay-C1 to replay-C5) of condition device numbers 7 to 11 or all of RT transition replays (in the third embodiment, in the RT state). Regardless, the re-game-C1 to the re-game-C5 may be overlapped by 1 each (5 in total). In this way, by making the bonus overlap with the RT transition replay, the bonus may be won even when the RT transition replay is won. Even if the RT transition replay is stopped, the bonus is denied. Therefore, it is possible to give the player expectations. Thus, for example, the probability of overlapping winning with a bonus combination and any small combination is 60/65536, the probability of overlapping winning with a bonus combination and any replaying combination is 7/65536, and the bonus combination is independent. The probability of winning is determined as 33/65536, and the total value of the probability of winning the bonus combination is 100/65536.

  The lower part of the figure shows a list of expected values when there is push order navigation. In this figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device SG in the AT state or the like, the reel is stopped according to the navigation. The average number of payouts per game (the average number of medals to be paid out by winning small roles, also referred to as the expected number of game media obtained in one game) and the expected increase or decrease in medals per game (3 The ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted when a game is played in a bet. When the value is larger than 1, the expected value is positive and the medal is increased. It will be minus and the number of medals will decrease). The number of medals inserted per game (the number of inserted game media when playing one game) is 3, and when the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, expected to increase or decrease medals per game The value is configured to be larger than 1. As shown in the figure, in the third embodiment, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game is larger than 1 only in the case of “RT3”, and per game in the RT state other than “RT3”. The expected medal increase / decrease value is smaller than 1. The numbers in the figure do not take into account the increase or decrease in medals due to bonuses. In other words, when a game progresses in a situation where push order navigation occurs (when operated in an optimal operation mode, also referred to as an advantageous operation mode), medals increase at “RT3”. In other RT states than “RT3”, medals will decrease. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the expected medal increase / decrease value may be larger than 1 in “RT2” and “RT4”. In addition, when the symbol combination that becomes the re-gamer is stopped and displayed, the bet number (three) in the previous game is actually bet automatically, but in calculating the expected increase / decrease value of the medal in the third embodiment, The calculation is made assuming that three medals are paid out.

  In addition, the calculation method of the average number of payouts per game and the expected medal increase / decrease value per game in each RT state is as follows. When the RT state is “RT0”, the average payout number per game is {regame Of the total number (replaying game appearance rate) (total number of setting numbers for condition device numbers 1 to 22 = 8951) × the number of payouts in the replaying game (3) + the number of bells (seven-card combination) ( Sum of small part appearance rate) (total number of placements for condition device numbers 23 to 41 = 16924) × the number of payouts (7 pieces) in the bell (7 pieces) + the number of places of 3 pieces (small portion appearance rate) Sum total (total number of set numbers for condition device numbers 42 to 49 = 11676) × total number of payouts (three pieces) in the three-piece role + 1 total number of set numbers (small appearance rate) (set for the condition device number 50) Total number of numbers = 30) x number of payouts per piece (1)} / all numbers Sum (65536) = 2.752365112 can be calculated as. Also, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game can be calculated as follows: average number of payouts per game / number of medals inserted per game (3) = 0.17474537.

  Next, when the RT state is “RT1”, the average number of payouts per game is {the sum of the number of re-game players (re-game player appearance rate) (the sum of the numbers for the condition device numbers 1 to 22) = 8989) × the sum of the number of payouts (3) + bell (seven-card combination) in the re-playing combination (small combination appearance rate) (total number of arrangements for condition device numbers 23 to 41 = 16924) × bell The number of payouts in (7-piece combination) (7) + the total number of 3-piece combination (small appearance rate) (total of the numbers for condition device numbers 42 to 49 = 1676) × the number of payouts in 3-piece combination ( 3) + total number of +1 number of combinations (small appearance rate) (total number of arrangements for condition device number 50 = 30) × the number of payouts in one combination (1)} / sum of all the numbers (65536) = 2.75414614. The expected medal increase / decrease value per game can be calculated as follows: average number of payouts per game / number of inserted medals per game (three) = 0.918034887.

  Next, when the RT state is “RT2”, the average number of payouts per game is: {total number of re-game characters (re-game character appearance rate) (total number of values for condition device numbers 1 to 22) = 8984) × the number of payouts in the re-playing game (3) + the sum of the numbers (small role appearance rate) of the bells (7 cards) (the sum of the numbers for the condition device numbers 23 to 41 = 16924) × the bell The number of payouts in (7-piece combination) (7) + the total number of 3-piece combination (small appearance rate) (total of the numbers for condition device numbers 42 to 49 = 1676) × the number of payouts in 3-piece combination ( 3) + total number of +1 number of combinations (small appearance rate) (total number of arrangements for condition device number 50 = 30) × the number of payouts in one combination (1)} / sum of all the numbers It can be calculated as (65536) = 2. The expected medal increase / decrease value per game can be calculated as follows: average number of payouts per game / number of medals inserted per game (3) = 0.917959.

  Next, when the RT state is “RT3”, the average number of payouts per game is {the sum of the number of re-game characters (re-game character appearance rate) (the sum of the numbers for the condition device numbers 1 to 22) = 36883) × the number of payouts in the re-playing game (3) + the total of the numbers (small role appearance rate) of the bell (seven roles) (the total of the numbers for the condition device numbers 23 to 41 = 16924) × the bell The number of payouts in (7-piece combination) (7) + the total number of 3-piece combination (small appearance rate) (total of the numbers for condition device numbers 42 to 49 = 1676) × the number of payouts in 3-piece combination ( 3) + total number of +1 number of combinations (small appearance rate) (total number of arrangements for condition device number 50 = 30) × the number of payouts in one combination (1)} / sum of all the numbers (65536) = 4.028885 can be calculated. The expected medal increase / decrease value per game can be calculated as follows: average number of payouts per game / number of medals inserted per game (3) = 1.342962.

  Next, when the RT state is “RT4”, the average number of payouts per game is {total number of re-game characters (re-game character appearance rate) (total number of values for condition device numbers 1 to 22) = 8951) × the total number of payouts (3) + bell (7-card combination) in the re-playing combination (the appearance ratio of the small combination) (the total of the numbers for the condition device numbers 23 to 41 = 16924) × the bell The number of payouts in (7-piece combination) (7) + the total number of 3-piece combination (small appearance rate) (total of the numbers for condition device numbers 42 to 49 = 1676) × the number of payouts in 3-piece combination ( 3) + total number of +1 number of combinations (small appearance rate) (total number of arrangements for condition device number 50 = 30) × the number of payouts in one combination (1)} / sum of all the numbers (65536) = 2.752365. The expected medal increase / decrease value per game can be calculated as follows: average number of payouts per game / number of inserted medals per game (3) = 0.917455.

  Next, referring to the block diagram of FIG. 59, an electrical schematic configuration of a spinning cylinder type gaming machine P according to the third embodiment will be described. First, the spinning-type game machine P according to the third embodiment is centered on a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, with a sub-control board S, a door board D, a spinning board K, a power board E, and a relay board. IN, a setting door switch M10, a setting key switch M20, a setting / reset button M30, and the like are connected to be able to exchange data. The solid line portion in the figure shows the movement related to the exchange of data, and the broken line portion in the figure shows the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN and the door board D without going through the main control board.

  The main control board (may be referred to as main control means, main board, main control means, main board, and main game unit) M is a board that governs the progress of the entire game performed in the revolving game machine P. A main control chip C is mounted on the main control board M, and a CPU MC, a built-in ROMC 110, a built-in RAMC 120, and the like are mounted on the main control chip C so as to be able to exchange data with each other via a bus. The main control board M receives a signal indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub-control board S, the door board D, and the rotating board. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or control signal) toward K etc. {For example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information toward the sub-control board S) The sub-control board S can perform push-push navigation on the effect display device SG (or the transmissive effect display device TSG)}.

  Also, the sub control chip SC is mounted on the sub control board (sometimes referred to as sub control means, sub board, sub control means, sub board, sub game unit) S, as with the above-described main control board M. The sub control chip SC is provided with a CPU SC, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is connected to be exchanged with each other via a bus. Further, various LED lamps S10, a speaker S20, an effect display device SG, a rotating backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, a transmissive effect display device TSG, and the like are connected to the sub control board S. Here, the spinning backlight S30 is a light that is provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the pattern drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub control board S analyzes the control command received from the main control board M, and drives each LED lamp S10, the speaker S20, the effect display device SG, the transmissive effect display device TSG, the rotary backlight S30, etc. Various effects are performed by outputting.

  On the door substrate D, the above-described insertion acceptance sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, second insertion sensor D30s, stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, start for starting the rotation of the reel M50. The lever D50, the stored game medals (credits) and the inserted game medals are paid out, the settlement button D60 for ending the game, and various display panels D70 for displaying the state of the game (not shown but described above) The inserted number display lamp D210, the operation state display lamp D180, the special game state display apparatus D250, the payout number display apparatus (push order display apparatus) D270 is a collection of display apparatuses such as the credit number display apparatus D200, etc. Door switch D80 for performing door open / close judgment, error cancellation, and setting value change, and is judged to be incompatible after being turned on. Been game medals (or other foreign) blocker D100 like to reimburse the outlet D240 is connected to. The door substrate D is connected to the main control substrate M described above so as to exchange data. For this reason, when a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a settlement button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, a signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, a signal that the insertion acceptance sensor D10s detects the passage of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M through the door board D.

  In addition, a rotating motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a rotating sensor K20 for detecting the rotational position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the rotating substrate K. The spinning board K can stop the reel M50 at the determined stop position by driving the spinning motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 by the spinning sensor K20. Yes. Further, in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine P of the third embodiment, a so-called step motor (stepping motor) is used as the spinning cylinder motor K10. In the step motor, 504 steps are set as the number of steps for one rotation of the reel M50. Each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) has a predetermined number of symbols (for example, 20 symbols) having a substantially uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is set. 24 steps (= 20/480) are set. There is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel are changed.

  The medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on a control signal from the main control board M. Perform the action The medal payout device H includes a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s for determining whether or not a medal has been paid out normally and measuring the number of game medals paid out, and a disk H50. A hopper motor H80 for rotation is connected.

  These various control boards and the power consumed by the boards are supplied from a power supply board E (a board for controlling the presence or absence of power supply by the power switch E10). In FIG. 58, the state in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is indicated by broken-line arrows. As shown in the figure, power is directly supplied from the power supply board E to the main control board M and the sub-control board S, and various boards (door board D, rotor board K, relay board IN) Electric power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and this electric power is converted into a DC voltage of a specified voltage and then supplied to each control board and board.

  In addition, the main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting / reset that can execute setting value change, error cancellation, and the like. A setting door switch M10 for determining opening / closing of a setting door (not shown) for protecting the button M30, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, and the like is connected. In addition, the main control board M has a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stop of the reel M50 (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53), and an “AT state” which is a state relating to AT that is advantageous to the player. AT lottery means for executing AT transition lottery for shifting to AT, and AT extra lottery for increasing the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of the AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the “AT state” And AT addition lottery means to be executed.

  Next, FIGS. 60 to 79 are flowcharts showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the third embodiment.

  The flowchart mainly includes processing steps (illustrated by rectangles), judgments (illustrated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), terminals indicating start / end / return, etc. (illustrated by rounded rectangles). ing. Moreover, when the details are illustrated in another flowchart among the processing steps, those referring to the other flowchart are illustrated as a subroutine (illustrated by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, in the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are also developed at the same time, but in this example, execution is performed with gaming machines with different specifications within the processing on the main control board M side. The subroutines to be executed (subroutines that are not normally used) are not left, and processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraudulent actions is prevented.

  First, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing that is executed for the first time by the CPUMC of the main control board M after turning on the power of the rotating game machine P (or at the time of system reset or user reset). . First, in step 4000, after turning on the spinning machine P, in step 4002, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a timer interrupt (in this case, the timer interrupt is not started but the timer interrupt is not started). Only the type of interrupt is set. In the subsequent processing, when a timer interrupt is started, a flowchart related to timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed). Next, in step 4004, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 4006, the CPUMC of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 4008, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area, power-off / power-off recovery) To check whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held), and generates power-off recovery data. Next, in step 4010, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 4014, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

  In the case of Yes in step 4014, in step 4016, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing flag in the RAM (turned on in step 4904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (in step 4006 Whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal is determined. In the case of Yes in step 4016, in step 4018, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines and sets the RAM initialization range as an unused RAM range (for example, sets it in the register area). Next, in step 4020, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 4018. Next, in step 4022, the CPU MC of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer stored in the process at power-off (step 4902). Next, in step 4036, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether or not the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (1 to 6 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 4036, in step 4038, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads the input port. Next, in step 4040, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 4002. Next, in step 4042, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the power-off process completion flag and returns to the process at the time of power-off according to the returned stack pointer.

  If No in step 4016, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area) in step 4024. Next, in step 4300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

  If NO in step 4036, in step 4046, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area). To set). Next, in step 4300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

  If NO in step 4014, in step 4028, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing completion flag in the RAM (turned on in step 4904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step Referring to (check result in 4006), it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 4028, in step 4030, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines and sets the RAM initialization range to all ranges except the set value in the RAM (for example, sets in the register area). , Step 4034 is entered. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4028, in step 4032, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines and sets the initialization range of the RAM to all ranges in the RAM (for example, sets in the register area). 4034. Next, in step 4034, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 4030 or step 4032. Next, in step 4100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process, which will be described later.

  Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area or the like) mounted on the main control board M is not a value at which a special game is executed. (In order to prevent a special game from being erroneously executed when a process for determining whether or not to execute a special game is executed due to noise or fraud immediately after the program processing is started). Although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured, and the byte storing information related to the random number is stored in the byte. It is preferable to configure to store only the information related to the random number (not to store other information such as various timer values) (when operating other data stored in the same 1 byte, due to noise etc. (To prevent the information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of setting change device control processing according to the subroutine of step 4100 in FIG. First, in step 4102, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes initialization of the stack pointer (initialization with the start address of the process). Next, in step 4104, the CPUMC of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 4106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (1 to 6 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 4106, in step 4108, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 1 = a value that is most unfavorable for the player) to the set value, and proceeds to step 4110. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4106, the process proceeds to step 4110. Next, in step 4110, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the setting changing device is operating, displays the set value on the setting display LED (not shown), and step 4112 is entered.

  Next, in step 4112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of Yes in step 4112, in step 4114, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (if the added set value exceeds 6, the set value becomes 1). , The process proceeds to step 4116. In the case of No in step 4112, the process proceeds to step 4116. Next, in step 4116, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of No in step 4116, the process proceeds to step 4112, and the processing of step 4112 to step 4116 is looped. In the case of Yes in step 4116, in step 4118, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 has been switched from on to off. If No in step 4118, the process in step 4118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 4118, in step 4120, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has ended, and the setting display LED (not shown) The display of the set value is erased, and the process proceeds to the game progress control process in step 4200.

  Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing relating to the subroutine of step 4300 in FIG. 60 (and called in other flowcharts). First, in step 4302, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits interruption (hereinafter, a flowchart relating to timer interruption processing described later is not executed). Next, in step 4304, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 4306, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the output port (in this example, 0 to 6, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors). Next, in step 4308, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 4310, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the output to each output port has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 4310, in step 4312, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process Is repeated, and the reset signal is input when the power supply voltage decreases, and the process ends. (That is, since an infinite loop is entered, any operation that prompts a return is not accepted). In the case of No in step 4310, the process proceeds to step 4306. The processing from step 4306 to step 4310 is processing for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, the information about the error, the game progress status at the time of the error, etc. are displayed on the hall computer side. It is possible to output to

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 4200 in FIG. First, in step 4202, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initialized with the start address of the process). Next, in step 4204, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area necessary for the game (for example, the upper limit of bets, the effective line for winning, etc.). Step 4204 is data for clearing data used in the previous game {eg, condition device number (winning number), production group number, instruction information} (“0” for clearing the RAM address). (Data) is also included in the RAM. In addition, you may make it comprise so that the number selected when the next game was performed may be overwritten, without clearing a condition apparatus number, production group number, instruction information, etc. Next, in step 4205, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, “RT0” etc.) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 4704 in FIG. 74). Then, the set RT state is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. Note that the processing for setting the RT state may be executed in step 4704 in FIG. In step 4704, the RT state may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. Next, in step 4206, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a state relating to the AT in the game (for example, “AT state”) (sets a state related to the AT determined in step 4756 of FIG. 76). . In step 4206, the state related to the set AT is also transmitted to the sub-control board S side. Further, the process for setting the state relating to AT may be executed in step 4756 of FIG. Next, in step 4207, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a command relating to the state relating to RT and the state relating to AT in the game (command to the sub-control board S side, and the effect relating to the game in step 7100). Set the command used to set the pattern. Next, in step 4208, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, a subtank (not shown) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H is provided, and a determination is made based on current conduction / non-conduction by a plurality of full detection sensors provided in the subtank (via the medal). If the current is conducted, it is determined to be full). If Yes in step 4208, the process proceeds to step 4218.

  On the other hand, if No in step 4208, in step 4210, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). ). Next, in step 4212, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an error number display corresponding to the medal full error with a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 4214, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the current from the sub tank is non-conductive and the set / reset button M30 has been pressed). To do. In the case of Yes in step 4214, in step 4216, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off). 4218. On the other hand, if No in step 4214, the process proceeds to step 4212. Next, in step 4218, the CPUMC of the main control board M permits medal insertion acceptance (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the re-gamer), and the next process (step 4220). The process proceeds to (1). Here, in Step 4218, the blocker D100 is turned on (process formed by the medal flow path). Specifically, when a re-game player is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on on the condition that the current storage number (credit) is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Run. In other words, when the current storage number (credit) is a predetermined value, the ON process of the blocker D100 is not executed. On the other hand, when the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the ON process of the blocker D100 is uniformly executed. With this configuration, even when a re-game player is established, if the number of stored credits does not reach a predetermined value, a game medal can be inserted, such as “RT1”. When you are staying in an RT state (for example, “RT3”) that has a higher probability of winning a re-gamer than in the RT state, or when you look at it, it is difficult to understand a re-gamer Even if the bell-bell-bell on the invalid line or the symbol combination in which the cherry is stopped on the left reel is stopped, the player can play the game with a good rhythm (without a sense of incongruity).

  Next, FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 4200 in FIG. First, in step 4220, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game medal is bet or no credit exists. In the case of Yes in step 4220, in step 4221, the CPUMC of the main control board M satisfies the set value display conditions (for example, when the door switch D80, the setting door switch M10, and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on, Whether or not the condition is satisfied). In the case of Yes in step 4221, in step 4222, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to a setting display LED (not shown, but may be a payout number display device D270, a credit number display device D200, or an insertion number display light D210). The value is displayed and the process proceeds to step 4221. In the case of No in step 4220 or step 4221, in step 4224, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes management related to the insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 4225, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 4226, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 4226, in step 4227, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in the third embodiment, insertion of medals). 2), and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been received. In the case of Yes in step 4227, in step 4230, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (the first input sensor D20s or the second input). When the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 4230, in step 4231, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been accepted. Although not shown, after step 4231, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the credit is the upper limit number (50 in this example) and the bet number is the maximum number (3 in this example). If the determination is Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state where no medal flow path is formed). If No in step 4230, the process of step 4230 is repeated. If No in step 4226 or step 4227, the process proceeds to step 4232.

  Next, in step 4232, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 4232, in step 4233, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there are remaining credits or bet gaming medals. In the case of Yes in step 4233, in step 4234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on a hopper driving flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven). The payout of one medal is executed. Next, in step 4236, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in order to detect the payout of medals in the third embodiment). And when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal is being performed). If “Yes” in step 4236, the process proceeds to step 4247. Here, although not explicitly shown in the flowchart, only the remaining number of credits is to be settled when the previous game was a re-game player.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4236, in step 4241, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the processing of step 4234). . Specifically, whether or not a situation where it is determined that a medal has not been paid out has continued for a predetermined time despite transmission of a hopper drive signal to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 4241, in step 4242, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 4244, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 4245, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). If YES in step 4245, in step 4246, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF). The process shifts to 4247. On the other hand, if No at step 4245, the routine proceeds to step 4244.

  Next, in step 4247, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal on which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 4247, in step 4248, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag, and proceeds to step 4233. If step 4241 or step 4247 is No, the process proceeds to step 4236.

  On the other hand, if NO in step 4232 or step 4233, the CPU MC of the main control board M has a valid start lever D50 in step 4251 (for example, a prescribed number of game medals for starting a game have been inserted, etc.) ) And whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated is determined. If YES in step 4251, in step 4252, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a start lever operation command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and is received on the sub-control board S side in step 7102. , A command that can execute an effect related to the game, such as an effect display device and a game effect lamp. In addition, the timing which performs the said production | presentation is not limited to this, An execution timing can also be determined by operation of the operation member from a player by operating various operation timers. Next, in step 4253, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (1 to 6 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 4253, in step 4254, the CPUMC of the main control board M moves to the next process (process of step 4257) after executing the process of acquiring random numbers and turning off the blocker D 100. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4253, in step 4256, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 4300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. If step 4251 is No, the process proceeds to step 4220.

  Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 4200 in FIG. First, in step 4257, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts an internal lottery (lottery for determining a winning combination that can be won in the game). Next, at step 4258, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the AT lottery execution state (“AT in-state”). In this example, it is “normal game state”, “normal BB internal game”, and “normal BB state”). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 4258, in step 4400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a lever AT lottery execution control process described later, and proceeds to step 4450. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4258, the process proceeds to step 4450. Next, in step 4450, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a conditional device number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 4259, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60, and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0 (whether or not the lottery is executed by adding the number of AT games). judge. In step 4259, a lottery is executed by adding the number of AT games based on the state related to the AT ("AT in preparation", "in-AT BB internal game", "in-AT BB state", "AT precursor state) Or “in-AT state”) may be determined. In the case of Yes in step 4259, in step 4500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a process for adding the number of games at lever, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 4550. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4259, the process proceeds to step 4550. It is also possible to execute the lottery using the lottery table that differs depending on the state relating to the AT in the lever-time game number addition execution process.

  Here, the states that can be taken as states relating to the AT in this example are listed and described in detail. (1) The “normal game state” is a state in which an AT is not won (a right to shift to the “AT state” is not acquired) and a bonus combination is not won. (2) The “AT precursor state” is a state in which the AT is won (the right to shift to the “AT state” has been acquired), but AT (push order navigation) has not started ( AT is started when the number of AT precursor games becomes “0”). (3) “Preparing AT” means a state in which an AT is won (the right to transition to “AT state” has been acquired) and stays until the most advantageous RT state is transitioned. (Navigation) is performed, but the AT remaining game number (AT counter value) is not subtracted. (4) The “AT state” is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of AT remaining games (AT counter value) is subtracted. In the “AT special state” or the like, the AT remaining game number (AT counter value) may not be subtracted. (5) “AT return state” means that the winning probability of the re-gamer fluctuates based on the fact that a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a specific symbol) is stopped and displayed in the “AT state”. This is the state until transition to the “medium state”. (6) “Normal BB inside game” is a state in which the BB role is won in the “normal game state” and the BB role is not won. (7) “In-AT BB internal game” is a state in which the BB role is won in “AT precursor state”, “AT in preparation”, “AT return state”, or “AT state”. In addition, a state where the BB combination is won in the “AT precursor state” and the BB combination is not won may be set as “normal BB internal game”. (8) The “normal BB state” is a state that is executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “normal BB inside game”. (9) The during-AT BB state is a state that is executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “in-AT BB internal game”.

  Next, in step 4550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel rotation start preparation process, which will be described later. Next, in step 4260, rotation of all reels is started. Next, in step 4261, the CPUMC of the main control board M is requested to create a pull-in point (required for determining the stop positions of the rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and the stop order and others. It is determined whether or not there is an appropriate request according to the reel stop position. In the case of Yes in step 4261, in step 4262, the CPUMC of the main control board M creates a pull-in point, and proceeds to step 4263. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4261, the process proceeds to step 4263. Next, in step 4263, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance check. Next, in step 4264, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether any stop button (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 4264, in step 4265, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). Then, the process proceeds to step 4266. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4264, the process proceeds to step 4266. Next, in step 4266, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an all reel stop check process.

  Next, in step 4268, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether any two reels are stopped. In the case of Yes in step 4268, in step 4268-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the role BB ("sheep" in this example) is a template. Here, “BB role is a temper” means that the stop symbols (“sheep” in this example) constituting the two BB roles are stopped on the active line (in this example, rising to the right) It means a state where the BB combination wins when a predetermined symbol constituting the BB combination further stops on the reel effective line (upward to the right). In the case of Yes in step 4268-1, in step 4268-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a command related to execution of the transparency effect during the tempering (command to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side performs the step If the command is received at 7526, a command for executing a Tempei transparency effect, which will be described later, is set, and the process proceeds to Step 4270. The tempering transparency effect is an effect executed on the transparency effect display device TSG when the BB role is tempered, and a detailed aspect will be described later. On the other hand, if the answer is No in 4268 or Step 4268-1, the process proceeds to Step 4270. Next, in step 4270, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether all the reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 4270, in step 4271, the CPUMC of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM and the internal established combination stop position data. Next, in step 4271-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the displayed symbol combination is normal (must match the winning combination determined by the internal lottery). Is determined to be abnormal). If YES in step 4271-2, the process proceeds to step 4271-3. On the other hand, if No in step 4271-2, in step 4273, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a display determination error display (for example, sets it in the register area). Next, in step 4300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. On the other hand, if No at step 4270, the routine proceeds to step 4261.

  Next, in step 4271-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether any winning combination has been won. In the case of Yes in step 4271-3, in step 4272, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a command related to execution of a winning effect at the time of winning (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side goes to step 7524. Command to be received) and the process proceeds to step 4274. The winning-time transparency effect is an effect that is executed on the transparency effect display device TSG when any of the winning combinations is won, and a detailed mode will be described later. Next, in step 4274, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning and shifts to the process of 4275. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4271-3, the process proceeds to step 4275.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (fourth sheet) according to the subroutine of step 4200 in FIG. First, in step 4275, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out game medals {the number of game medals earned by winning exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). If the game medal is paid out}. In the case of Yes in step 4275, in step 4276, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag in the first RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven). Pay out one game medal. Next, in step 4277, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 4277, the process proceeds to step 4286.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4277, in step 4279, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the processing timing of step 4276). . In the case of Yes in step 4279, in step 4280, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 4281, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display with a 7-segment LED. Next, in step 4282, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 4282, in step 4283, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), 4286. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4282, the process proceeds to step 4281.

  Next, in step 4286, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal on which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 4286, in step 4288, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 4290. If step 4279 or step 4286 is No, the process proceeds to step 4277. Next, in step 4290, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the winning (the winning that became Yes in step 4275) has been completed. If YES in step 4290, the flow advances to step 4291. In the case of No in step 4275, the process proceeds to step 4291. If No in step 4290, the process proceeds to step 4276.

  Next, in step 4291, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in a state related to AT that can execute a lottery to determine whether or not the state related to the AT wins the right to shift to the AT lottery execution state (the “AT state”). In this example, it is determined whether or not the “normal gaming state” or “normal BB state”). In the third embodiment, as the gaming state, the RT state, which is a gaming state in which the re-gamer's lottery probability may be different, and push order navigation (push order display device D270 and effect display device SG, or transparent effect display) The device TSG) has two types of gaming states, ie, a state relating to AT, which is a gaming state relating to the presence / absence of the occurrence of a reel) which is the most advantageous to the player related to the condition device. Note that a combination of the RT state and the state relating to the AT may be a state relating to the ART and may be one type of gaming state.

  In the case of Yes in step 4291, in step 4800, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a stop-time AT lottery execution control process described later, and proceeds to step 4700. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4291, in other words, the state related to AT is a state in which the number of AT games (sometimes referred to as the number of remaining AT games) can be added (AT counter value that is the number of games that can execute push-order navigation) Is greater than 0 and the AT counter value can be added), in step 6300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a winning game number addition execution process, which will be described later. In step 4291, a state in which the number of AT games is added and the lottery is executed based on the state relating to AT (“AT in preparation”, “AT state in BB state”, “AT in-BB internal game”, or “ It may be determined whether or not it is “at AT state”. It is also possible to execute lottery using different lottery tables depending on the state related to AT. Next, in step 4292, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the AT counter M60. By this processing, the AT remaining game number is subtracted.

  Next, in step 4700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes RT state transition control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 4750, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an AT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 4293, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, game state transition process, etc.), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4202).

  Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of lever AT lottery execution control processing according to the subroutine of Step 4400 in the third embodiment. First, in step 4404, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the normal BB state. In the case of Yes in step 4404, in other words, when the state related to the current AT is either “normal game state” or “normal BB internal game”, in step 4406, the CPUMC of the main control board M The condition device related to the game is a condition device number in which the acquisition lottery for acquiring the right to shift to the “AT state” at the time when it is established in the normal lever AT lottery role (non-BB) is executed. (Condition device number 49), weak watermelon (condition device number 48), strong chance (condition device number 50), weak cherry (condition device number 15), strong cherry (condition device number 16)). judge. In the case of Yes in step 4406, in step 4408, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current lottery state is a “high probability state”. In the third embodiment, a plurality of lottery states are provided even in the state related to the same AT, and if the lottery states are different, the AT winning rate (winning rate of winning lottery for shifting to the AT state) is obtained. It will be different. In the third embodiment, the lottery state is provided only in the “normal game state” (there is no problem even if a plurality of lottery states are provided in other AT-related states).

  In the case of Yes in step 4408, in step 4410, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the high probability AT lottery table (the probability of winning the AT lottery is higher than the low probability AT lottery table described later) The AT transition lottery is executed with the lottery probability based on the condition device number related to the game, and the process proceeds to step 4414. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4408, in other words, if the current lottery state is “low probability state”, in step 4412, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a low probability AT lottery table (the above-described high probability AT lottery). The probability of winning the AT lottery is lower than that in the table), the AT transfer lottery is executed with the lottery probability based on the condition device number related to the game, and the process proceeds to step 4414. Next, in step 4414, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed AT lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 4414, in step 4418, the CPUMC of the main control board M is an AT winning flag (a flag that is turned on when winning the AT lottery. "Status" and "Transition to AT state") are turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 4450).

  If No in step 4404, in other words, if the current AT state is the “normal BB state”, in step 4416, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates that the condition device number related to the game is the BB lever time. Is the AT lottery role (condition device number (not shown) corresponding to Seven in this example) in which the acquisition lottery for acquiring the right to shift to the AT state at the time of establishment in BB is executed? Determine whether or not. If YES in step 4416, the process proceeds to step 4418 to turn on the AT winning flag, and if NO, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 4450) (the AT winning flag is not turned on). Note that if the answer is No in step 4406 or step 4414, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4450).

  Here, the lower part of the figure shows a high probability AT lottery table and a low probability AT lottery table. As shown in the figure, in the third embodiment, the AT winning rate is different depending on the lottery state, and the “high probability state” is more relative to the AT transition lottery than the “low probability state”. It is easier to win. In addition, there is no problem even if the winning probability of the AT transfer lottery for each condition device number is changed. In the third embodiment, the AT transition lottery winning probability is determined according to the type of the condition device number and the lottery state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it varies depending on the set value. For example, in a case where the setting value is configured in 6 stages of 1 to 6, setting 1 is the hardest to win the AT transition lottery, and setting 6 is the most winning AT transition lottery You may comprise so that it may become easy. Similarly, in the lottery to add the number of AT games, which will be described later, setting 1 is the most difficult to win the lottery by adding the number of AT games (the expected value for adding the number of AT games is low), and setting 6 is the lottery to add the number of AT games. It is also possible to configure so that it is easy to win (the expected value for adding the number of AT games is high). In addition, as another example in which the winning ratio between the AT transition lottery and the AT game number addition lottery is different depending on the setting value, the odd setting values, Setting 1, Setting 3, and Setting 5, are relatively the number of AT games. It is easy to win the extra lottery (the expected value for adding the number of AT games is high), and is relatively difficult to win the AT transition lottery. The setting values 2, 4, and 6 are even setting values. It is relatively difficult to win a lottery by adding the number of AT games (the expected value for adding the number of AT games is low), and it may be relatively easy to win the AT transition lottery. Depending on whether the value is an odd number or an even number, it becomes a different game characteristic, and the interest is further enhanced.

  Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process according to the subroutine of step 4450 in FIG. 65 in the third embodiment. First, in step 4452, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the status related to AT in which the status related to AT is push order navigation (“AT in preparation”, “AT in progress”, “AT in BB internal game” and “ It is determined whether or not it is a state related to any AT in the “BB state during AT”. In this example, displaying the stop order of reels, which is the most profitable to the player with the push order display device D270 and the effect display device SG (or the transmissive effect display device TSG), is referred to as push order navigation. Yes. In the case of Yes in step 4452, in step 4454, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game has a pushing order (a condition device having a different winning combination depending on the pushing order). To do. In the case of Yes in step 4454, in step 4456, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is an AT game by adding a winning combination {stopped symbol combination (or stop switch stop operation sequence). In this example, push order cherries ("replay-G1 (condition device number 17)", "replay-G2 (condition device number 18)", and "replay-G3") can be added. (Condition device number 19) "), or in the order of pushing order (" Re-game-H1 (condition device number 20) "," Re-game-H2 (condition device number 21) "and" Re-game-H3 (condition device) No. 22) ”)}. Here, in the third embodiment, when the number of AT games is related to an AT that can be added (increased), a condition device number including a push order cherry (for example, “replay-G1 (condition device number 17 ) ”) Is not deterministic that the number of AT games will be added and the lottery will be executed even if the win is won, but the push order (reel stop) In order), the reels are stopped, and the push order cherry is stopped and displayed (or it may be determined by the stop switch stop operation order). The push order hitting game, which is an effect of encouraging whether or not the reels can be stopped in accordance with the push order in which the push order cherry is stopped and displayed, is executed. Has been. Therefore, when the push order cherry is won, the push order that the push order cherry will stop display is not notified. For example, “= 0” is displayed on the push order display device D270, and the effect display device is based on the fact that the sub control board S receives a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) transmitted from the main control board M. In SG, a display such as “????” is displayed so that the player can recognize that the game is a push-to-order game. Note that the number of AT games is the number of games (number of games that can be played in the AT state) that is guaranteed that push order navigation can occur (the profit given to the player by the push order (for example, In the case of a condition device number that does not differ (the number of payouts, the transition of the RT state, the winning probability of AT lottery), push order navigation may not occur)

  In the case of Yes in step 4456, in step 4458, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a pressing order number) in the game based on the condition device number of the game, and stores the instruction number. Is stored in a RAM address (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the order of pressing, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device SG (or the transmissive effect display device TSG) by receiving the instruction number. Even when the push order navigation is not executed, the instruction number is determined (the instruction number becomes an initial value based on clearing the instruction number in S1462) (for example, when the instruction number is “A0”). There is no push order navigation). When a push order hit game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the push order hit game is determined in S1462. Next, in step 4460, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the determined instruction number, and proceeds to step 4466. On the other hand, if No in Step 4442, Step 4454, or Step 4456, in Step 4462, the CPUMC of the main control board M presses the instruction number associated with the game and does not execute the sequential navigation (in this example, "A0") is determined (the instruction number becomes an initial value based on clearing the instruction number), and the process proceeds to step 4466.

  Next, in step 4466, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets (for example, sets in the register area) a command related to the instruction number determined in step 4458 or step 4462 (command to the sub control board S side). . Next, in step 4468, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a mask process on the condition device number of the game, and stores the masked information at a predetermined address in the RAM. Here, when the information related to the condition device number related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the information related to the condition device number is recognized by an illegal act, the high profit related to the game That is, the pushing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S is executed after executing the mask process {the process of concealing the information related to the condition device number (especially the information related to the pressing order)} to the information related to the condition device number related to the game. It is configured so that a highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. In addition, as a method of mask processing in the third embodiment, a plurality of condition device numbers (condition device numbers having similar roles are suitable. For example, the combination of symbols that become a promoted re-game player is stopped by pressing order. A plurality of condition device numbers that can be displayed are set as one effect group number (for example, condition device numbers 2 to 6 are set as effect group 2), and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. Yes. Note that the mask processing method is not limited to this. For example, a condition device number after mask processing is newly provided after the provided condition device number (1 to 51 in this example). May be. Also in such a case, it is desirable to provide a condition device number after masking processing using a plurality of condition device numbers as one condition device number among existing condition device numbers such as production group numbers ( For example, the condition device numbers 2 to 6 are set as the condition device number 54 that is the condition device number after the mask processing). If it is determined that the game is a game for notifying operation information (push order navigation) based on the state of the AT on the main control board M, the condition device number is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and the operation information is displayed. In games that are not notified, the production group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

  Next, in step 4470, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub-control board S side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing (for example, set in the register area). To do. Next, in step 4472, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives a command related to the bonus condition device number (whether the bonus is won or not can be recognized on the side of the sub control board S) (to the side of the sub control board S). Command) is set (for example, set in the register area), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 4259). In this example, what is referred to only as the condition device number is the condition device number for the small combination / replay combination and is different from the bonus condition device number. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, examples of the push order navigation display are as follows: (1) If a fall re-playing role is included → Push order that does not become a fall re-playing role Navi, (2) When a promoted regamer is included → Navigate the push order that the promoted regamer will be stopped, (3) When a push order cherry is included → Push the order that becomes the push order cherry Navigation, (4) In the case of the bell (three-piece combination, seven-piece combination) → The push order with the largest number of payouts is configured as navigation, etc. In the “AT state”, (1 ) If a fall replay player is included → Navigate the push order in which the fall replay role is not stopped, (2) If a promoted replay player is included → navigate the push order in which the promoted replay player is stopped , (3) When push order cherries are included → Navigate the push order of push order cherries, (4) Bell (3 sheets, 7 sheets In the case of (combination) → navigation, etc. are configured in order of pushing in which the number of payouts is the largest.

  Next, FIG. 69 shows an example of the effect group number list of the spinning reel type gaming machine P according to the third embodiment. As described above, when transmitting information related to the condition device number determined by the main control board M to the sub control board S, the masking process is performed to determine the effect group number, and the effect group number is assigned to the sub control board. S is configured to be transmitted to S. The production group number is the condition device number and the winning combination that has the same role (for example, the replaying role including the promoted replaying role, the replaying role including the falling replaying role, the push order bell, etc.) Are grouped and assigned numbers. A mask process {processing for concealing information (specifically, information related to the pressing order) related to the condition device number} is performed on the information related to the condition device number related to the game, and then transmitted to the sub-control board S. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the information related to the conditional device number is recognized by an illegal act and the pushing order (reel stop order) which is a high profit related to the game is recognized. Hereinafter, the processing until the production group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S side will be described in detail.

  As processing on the main control board M side related to the effect group number, (1) a winning / replay winning number stored in the RAM related to the game is stored in a first register (for example, A register). The winning / replay winning number corresponds to the condition device number shown in FIG. 57 in the third embodiment. Further, the winning number of the bonus combination when the bonus combination is won is stored in another storage area of the RAM. (2) The start address of the “production group number designation table” in which the production group numbers stored in the ROM are stored in the second register (for example, the HL register). This table defines which effect group number is designated in correspondence with the replay winning number. When the head address is the X address, the X group has an effect group number “0” corresponding to the winning / replay winning number 0. The (X + 1) address is set to the effect group number “1” corresponding to the winning / replay winning number 1 and the (X + 2) address is the effect group number corresponding to the winning / replay winning number 2. “2” is defined, and the (X + 3) address is defined with the production group number “2” corresponding to the winning / replay winning number 3 and the (X + n) address. It is defined is "Y" director group number corresponding to the winning and re-game winning numbers n is in}. (3) An effect group number is acquired from the effect group number designation table by an arithmetic process using the first register and the second register (specifically, an addition process of the first register and the second register). In other words, the winning / replay winning number is used as an offset value, and the effect group number is obtained from the effect group number designation table in the register. (The obtained effect group number may be stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM.) (4) The effect group number is stored (stored) in a buffer (RAM) for transmitting to the sub-control board S.

  When such processing is performed uniformly, the mask processing is performed regardless of the gaming state (specifically, “AT state”, “normal gaming state”, etc.) on the main control board M side, and the pressing order number. Therefore, the number of judgment limbs is reduced, and the program of the main control board M can be simplified.

  As a specific example of the correspondence between the production group number and the condition device number, for example, when the condition device number is 0 (losing), the production group number is 0, and the condition device number is 1 (replay-A) ( If the replay is normal), the production group number is 1, and the condition device number is 2 to 6 (replay-B1 to replay-B5) (RT transition replay is win), the production group number is 2, and the condition device In the case of numbers 7 to 11 (replay-C1 to replay-C5) (RT transfer replay is won), the production group number is 3 and the condition device numbers 12 to 14 (replay-D1 to replay-D3) In the case (RT transfer replay is won), the production group number is 4 and the condition device number 15 (replay-E) (the weak cherry is won), the production group number is 5 and the condition device number 16 (replay- F) (strong cherry is this ), When the production group number is 6 and the condition device number 17 (replay-G1) (push order cherry wins), when the production group number is 7 and the condition device number 18 (replay -G2) (push If the order cherry is elected), the production group number is 8, and the condition device number 19 (re-game-G3) (push order cherry is elected), the production group number is 9, the condition device number 20 (re-game-H1) In the case of (the push order chance wins), the production group number is 10, and in the case of the condition device number 21 (replay-H2) (the push order chance wins), the production group number is 11, the condition device number 22 In the case of (replay-H3) (pushing order chance wins), the production group number is 12, and the condition device numbers 23 to 28 (winning-A1-winning-A6) (pushing order bell wins) Production group number 3. In the case of condition device numbers 29 to 34 (winning-B1 to winning-B6) (push order bell wins), the production group number is 14 and the condition device numbers 35 to 40 (winning-C1 to winning-C6) In the case (pushing order bell is won), the production group number is 15, and the condition device number 41 (winning-D) (the common bell is winning), the production group number is 16, and the condition device numbers 42 to 47 (winning- In the case of E1-Winning-E6) (Three winning combinations that can stop specific symbols are elected), in the case of production group number 17 and conditional device number 48 (Winning-F) (weak watermelon wins), production group When the number is 18 and the conditional device number is 49 (winning-G) (strong watermelon is won), the production group number is 19 and the conditional device number is 50 (winning-H) (strong chance is winning) Group number 20 and conditional device number 51 In the case of (winning-I) (special role in RB is elected), the production group number is 21. It should be noted that, in the specification for executing the above-described pushing order hitting game (game executed when any of the condition device numbers 17 to 22 is won), at least one of the condition device numbers 17 to 22 is won. In order to keep it confidential, for example, it is desirable to set the condition device numbers 17 to 19 to the same effect group number and set the condition device numbers 20 to 22 to the same effect group number.

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the add-on-game-number execution process according to the subroutine of Step 4500 of FIG. 65 in the third embodiment. First, in step 4502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the condition device number relating to the game is an extra player at the time of winning (regardless of whether or not a prize is won, a conditional device that can add the number of remaining AT games by winning. In this example, weak watermelon (condition device number 48), strong watermelon (condition device number 49), weak cherry (condition device number 15), strong cherry (condition device number 16), strong chance (condition device) Number 50) and bell (condition device numbers 23 to 28)). In the case of Yes in step 4502, in step 4508, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the extra game number lottery table (for example, a lottery table provided in the ROM area) at the time of winning, and determines the AT extra game number. Determine (for example, determine in which range the latched random number value falls within the lottery table shown outside the column). Note that determining the number of AT extra games is also referred to as performing AT extra lottery. Next, in step 4510, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the determined AT added game number to the counter value of the AT counter M60, sets the AT counter value after the addition to the AT counter M60, The process proceeds to the process (the process of Step 4550). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 4550) also in the case of No in step 4502.

  Here, the lottery table shown outside the figure is an example of the extra game number lottery table at the time of winning, and in the third embodiment, states related to the AT in which the push order navigation is executed (“AT ready”, “ In the case of “ON state”, “AT state in BB internal state” and “BB state in AT”), when the winning combination is won, the number of AT additional games is determined by lottery from “0” to “300” Then, the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. When “0” is determined, the AT remaining game number does not increase.

  In addition, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT added games when winning the winning combination at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure, and the winning combination is a weak watermelon as a specific calculation method. In this case, {number (900) × AT additional number of games (0) + number (50) × AT additional number of games (10) + number (50) × AT additional number of games (30) + number ( 24) × AT addition number of games (100)} / total number of entries (1024) = 4.3 (game).

  Next, when the winning combination is a strong watermelon, {number (500) × AT added game number (0) + place number (200) × AT added game number (50) + place number (300) × AT The number of added games (100) + number (24) × AT number of added games (300)} / total number of numbers (1024) = 46.1 (game).

  Next, when the winning combination is a weak cherry, {number (800) × AT added game number (0) + number (100) × AT added game number (10) + number (100) × AT The number of added games (30) + number (24) × AT number of added games (100)} / total number of numbers (1024) = 6.3 (game).

  Next, when the winning combination is a strong cherry, {number (300) × AT additional game number (0) + number (300) × AT additional game number (30) + number (400) × AT The number of additional games (50) + the number of places (24) × the number of AT additional games (300)} / the total number of places (1024) = 35.4 (games).

  Next, when the winning combination is a strong chance, {number (300) × AT added game number (30) + place number (500) × AT added game number (50) + number (224) × It can be calculated as follows: AT addition game number (200)} / total number of numbers (1024) = 77.0 (game).

  Next, when the winning combination is a bell (seven-card combination), {place number (1023) × AT extra game number (0) + place number (1) × AT extra game number (200)} / place number Total number (1024) = 0.2 (game).

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 4550 in FIG. 65 in the third embodiment. First, in step 4552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is zero. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). It is a timer that measures. In the case of Yes in step 4552, in step 4554, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts by setting a new minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) to the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70. Next, in step 4556, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order related to the finished game and the information related to the push order. Next, in step 4558, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the information relating to the reel stop related to the finished game and the drawing point creation request. Next, in step 4560, the CPUMC of the main control board M initializes symbol stop position data relating to the finished game. Next, in step 4562, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an output request at the start of reel rotation related to the game. Next, in step 4564, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game. In other words, a command for indicating that the reel starts to rotate can be transmitted to the sub-control board S by the processing of step 4562 and step 4564. Next, in step 4566, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state stored in the RAM area from the reel stop state to the reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to the next processing (step 4260 processing). Transition.

  Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the stop-time AT lottery execution control process according to the subroutine of Step 4800 of FIG. 66 in the third embodiment. First, in step 4802, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a condition device in which the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery at the time of stop (a winning lottery for shifting to the “AT state” by winning) is executed. Yes, in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a pressing order cherry). In the case of Yes in step 4802, in step 4803, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery at the time of stoppage has won as a winning combination related to the game (for example, the push order cherry is displayed in a stopped manner). Depending on the order of pressing, the pressing order cherry may or may not be displayed even if the condition device is obtained. In the case of Yes in step 4803, in step 4812, the CPUMC of the main control board M is an AT winning flag (a flag that is turned on when winning the AT lottery. ”And“ Transition to AT state ”) is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 4700). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 4700) also in the case of No in Step 4802 or Step 4803.

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the winning game number addition execution process according to the subroutine of Step 6300 of FIG. 66 in the third embodiment. First, in step 6302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is an additional player at the time of winning a prize (a condition device that can add the number of remaining AT games by winning a prize. = Condition device number 17 to 19 and pushing order chance = Condition device number 20 to 22). In the case of Yes in step 6302, in step 6306, the CPUMC of the main control board M won the winning combination when winning a prize (corrected in the pushing order of the pushing order cherry (one of the replays 07 was stopped) or pushed in order. It is determined whether or not the correct answer has been given in the order of pressing the chances (one of the replays 09 has been stopped). As a determination method, a pressing order number for determination is separately determined, the determined pressing order number is stored in the RAM, and the pressing order in which the stop switch is actually operated is compared with the determined pressing order number. It is also possible to adopt a method for determining the pressing order and a method for determining the pressing order by specifying the pressing order from the condition device number. In the case of Yes in step 6306, in step 6309, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the winning game number lottery table and determines the AT additional game number (for example, latched in the lottery table shown outside the margin). Determine which range the random number value falls within.) Next, in step 6310, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the determined AT additional game number to the counter value of the AT counter M60, sets the AT counter value after the addition to the AT counter M60, Processing (proceeds to step 4292). Even in the case of No in step 6302 or step 6306, the next process (proceeds to step 4292).

  Here, the lottery table shown outside the figure is an example of an extra game number lottery table at the time of winning a prize, and as shown in the figure, a state related to AT in which push order navigation is executed (“AT in preparation”, In the case of “AT state”, “AT state during BB internal state” and “BB state during AT”), when the AT extra lottery is won, the number of AT extra games is determined by lottery from “5” to “300” Then, the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60.

  In addition, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT extra games when winning the extra combination at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure. As a specific calculation method, the winning combination is a push order cherry. If there is, {number (900) × AT additional game number (50) + number (100) × AT additional game number (100) + number (24) × AT additional game number (300)} / position The total number can be calculated as follows (1024) = 60.7 (game).

  In addition, when the winning combination is the chance of pushing, {place number (1020) × AT extra game number (0) + placement number (4) × AT extra game number (100) / total number of places (1024 ) = 5.4 (game).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 70 and FIG. 73, the AT addition lottery in the third embodiment is configured to be determined based on the winning condition device number, and if the RT state is different, The lottery probabilities are different, and as a result, the average value of the number of AT added games per game is different. For example, when the RT state is “RT3”, the probability of winning the push order chance item (condition device numbers 20 to 22) is 6600/65536, and the average number of AT-added games when the push order chance item is won is Since the value is 5.4 games, the average value of the number of AT-added games per game according to the pushing order chance is 6600/65536 × 5.4 games = 0.54 games. On the other hand, when the RT state is “RT1”, the probability of winning the push order chance (condition device numbers 20 to 22) is 0/65536, and the average number of AT-added games when the push order chance is won is Since the value is 5.4 games, the average value of the AT added games per game according to the push order chance is 0/65536 × 5.4 games = 0 games. As such, when the RT state is different, the average value of the number of AT additional games per game is different. In addition, the average value of the AT additional game number per game for other condition devices that can execute the lottery with the AT game number additional calculation is calculated in the same manner, and the total value is calculated by adding up the average value of the AT additional game number per game. Can be calculated. As described above, in the third embodiment, regardless of the RT state, the AT addition is made with reference to the same AT extra game number lottery table (AT extra game number lottery table when winning, AT extra game number lottery table when winning). Although the lottery will be executed, the average value of the number of AT-added games per game differs depending on the winning rate of the condition device depending on the RT state. In this way, in a gaming machine in which the AT addition lottery is more advantageous in “RT3” than in “RT1”, it is possible to stay in “RT3” if the game progresses according to the push navigation in the “AT state”. When the player deliberately stops the reels in the push order different from the push order navigation and shifts to “RT1”, the AT is added and the lottery is treated coldly. Similarly, for the small role that does not change depending on the RT state, similarly, by using the same AT additional game number lottery table, the AT addition that can obtain the average value (expected value) of the same AT additional game number regardless of the RT state. A lottery can be executed. For example, the probability of winning a strong watermelon (condition device number 48) when the RT state in the “AT state”, “AT in preparation”, or “AT return state” is “RT3” is 160/65536 Yes, when the strong watermelon is won, the average value of the AT additional game number is 46.1 games. Therefore, the average value of the AT additional game number per game by the strong watermelon is 160/65536 × 46.1 games = 0.11 games. On the other hand, the probability of winning the strong watermelon (condition device number 48) when the RT state is “RT1” is 160/65536, and the average value of the AT additional games when the strong watermelon is won is 46.1 games. Therefore, the average value of the number of AT additional games per game by strong watermelon is 160/65536 × 46.1 games = 0.11 games. As such, for the small role that does not change depending on the RT state, by using the same AT additional game number lottery table, the AT addition that can obtain the average value (expected value) of the same AT additional game number regardless of the RT state. A lottery can be executed.

  In the AT transition lottery, as in the AT addition lottery, the same AT lottery table is referred to regardless of the RT state based on the condition device number, and the appearance rate of the condition device is changed depending on the RT state. You may comprise so that the winning rate of transfer lottery may differ (for example, AT transfer lottery with reference to the same AT lottery table by the condition apparatus with different winning probabilities depending on the RT state such as condition apparatus numbers 15 to 22) Run).

  Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of RT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 4700 in FIG. 66 in the third embodiment. First, in step 4702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition enabling condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the third embodiment, the RT state transition enabling condition is configured to be satisfied by stoppage of a specific symbol, stop of a predetermined symbol based on a stop display of a specific re-gamer, and winning / starting / ending of a BB. Has been. In the case of Yes in step 4702, in step 4704, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not to transition to the RT state and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT state transition enabling condition, and performs the next process (step 4750). Shift to processing). Note that if the result is No in step 4702, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 4750). In the third embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels are stopped. However, when transitioning to “RT4”, the transition timing may be shifted when the lever is turned on. The timing for transitioning to the RT state (stores the RT number in the RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

  Next, FIG. 75 is an RT state transition diagram 1 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, there are six RT states “RT0” to “RT5”, and the RT state shifts by satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the drawing. As a specific example of the transition of the RT state, when the RT state is “RT0”, the condition device of “winning-E3 (3 sheets)” is won and the stop button D40 is “left → middle → right”. When stopping in the order of (second and third stops are optional), a specific symbol {probing order (maximum payout number (expected value) at the time of winning the three-piece combination) with a probability of 3/4 (first stop of the middle reel) If it is stopped in the pressing order other than that), it can win a prize} stops, and the process shifts to “RT1”. On the other hand, when “Bell / Blank / B / Replay A” stops on the active line with a probability of 1/4, and the winning combination (for example, “medium” becomes the maximum payout number (expected value) when three winning combinations are won. If the stop button D40 is operated in “→ left → right”), the RT state maintains “RT0”. When the RT state is “RT1” and the “replay-B3” condition device is won, the stop button D40 is operated and the reels are stopped in the order of “middle → left → right” (for example, the reel M50 is When “sheep / replay A / watermelon A” is stopped on the active line), the symbol combination “replay 05” is stopped and displayed, and the process proceeds to “RT2”. Next, when the RT state is “RT2”, the “re-game-C5” condition device is won, and the player sets the stop button D40 to “right → left → middle” (second and third stops are optional). When stopped in order (for example, reel M50 is on the active line, “Sheep / Replay A / Replay B” is stopped), the symbol combination “Replay 06” is stopped and the RT state shifts to “RT3” To do. On the other hand, when the RT state is “RT3” or “RT2”, for example, the condition device of “re-game C-3” is won and the player operates the stop button D40 “right → left → middle” in this order ( For example, in the reel M50, “Bell / Replay A / Bell” is stopped on the active line), and the symbol combination “Replay 03” is stopped and displayed, and the RT state shifts to “RT1”. Similarly, when the RT state is “RT3” or “RT2”, the condition device of “winning-E3” which is a three-piece combination is won, and the stop button D40 is set to “left → middle → right” (second, third When stopping in the order of (optionally stopped), presses other than the pressing order (the middle reel is set as the first stop) with a specific symbol {maximum payout number (expected value) at the time of winning the three-piece combination with a probability of 3/4 If it stops in order, it can win a prize} stops, so that it shifts to “RT1”. On the other hand, when “Bell / Blank / B / Replay A” stops on the active line with a probability of 1/4, and the winning combination (for example, “medium” becomes the maximum payout number (expected value) when three winning combinations are won. When the stop button D40 is operated in “→ Left → Right”), the RT state maintains “RT2” or “RT3”. Here, the RT device is “RT0”, “RT1”, “RT2” and “RT3”, and the “winning-G (strong watermelon)” condition device in which “type 1 BB01” (BB) is selected in duplicate BB won in the BB formation game (if the “Sheep / Sheep / Sheep” is stopped on the active line) is not won (if the strong watermelon is won, for example, the active line) When “watermelon B / replay A / replay A” is stopped), the RT state shifts to “RT4”. In addition, you may make it transfer to "RT4" based on BB having been established by the lottery means. If it is “RT4” and BB is won by operating the stop button D40 (“Sheep / Sheep / Sheep” is stopped on the active line), the process proceeds to “RT5”. On the other hand, if BB is won in the BB formation game (“Sheep / Sheep / Sheep” is stopped on the active line), the RT state shifts to “RT4” in one game, and from “RT4” to “RT5” Will be transferred to. In the case where BB is won in the BB formation game (“Sheep / Sheep / Sheep” is stopped on the active line), the process may be shifted directly to “RT5” without going through “RT4”. Next, after the end of the BB, the RT state shifts from “RT5” to “RT0”. Although not shown, after the RAM clear execution associated with the setting change process when the power supply is turned off and the power supply is normal, the RT number is restored to the RT number before the RAM is cleared (the address for storing the RT number is set when the RAM is cleared). (Not included in the address range to be cleared) or “RT0”. It should be noted that the power is turned off under the condition of a specific RT state (for example, “RT5”), and after executing the RAM clearing accompanying the setting change process when the power is turned off and the power is restored normally, it is set to “RT0”. Also good. Note that “RT3” is in the RT state with the highest probability of winning the re-game player. Note that re-game 03 and re-game 04 are re-players who can fall the RT state (transition to RT state disadvantageous to the player), and re-game 05 and re-game 06 are promoted to the RT state (advantageous to the player). Re-games that can be transferred to a different RT state), and re-game 01 and re-game 02 are re-games that do not trigger the transition of the RT state. Further, when the reels are stopped in the push order different from the push order navigation when the push order navigation occurs, the RT state falls if the symbol combination that becomes the replay 03 or the replay 04 is stopped and displayed (for example, , “RT3” is shifted to “RT1”), but when the symbol combination that becomes the replay 01 or the replay 02 is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not fall (for example, “RT3” is maintained) ) In the third embodiment, in a game in which any of the condition device numbers 42 to 47 is determined, the game is operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 56) determined in advance and operated at a specific operation timing. As a result, a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed. However, in a game in which any of the condition device numbers 42 to 47 is determined, a predetermined predetermined number is set regardless of the stop button operation timing. It may be configured such that a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed when operated in the order of operations (see FIG. 57). Further, in a game in which any of the condition device numbers 23 to 40 is determined, one winning combination is awarded in an operation order other than the operating order in which a winning 7 winning combination is won. A symbol combination corresponding to (for example, a bell spilling role) may be defined as a specific symbol combination (which becomes an RT transition condition). Further, in a game in which any one of the condition devices 23 to 40 is determined, it may be configured that there is a case where a prize is not won (missed) depending on the stop button operation timing. Even when the reels are stopped in a pushing order different from the pushing order with the highest profit, if the small part to be paid out does not win (missed), the RT state is changed (for example, , “RT0” to “RT1” may be configured).

  Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 4750 in FIG. 66 in the third embodiment. First, in step 4752, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state transition enabling condition is satisfied in the game. It should be noted that both the “high probability state” and the “low probability state” in the lottery state are the “normal game state”. In the case of Yes in step 4752, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the AT winning flag in step 4754 (for example, when shifting from the “AT precursor state” to the “AT state”), the “normal game state” The AT winning flag is turned off in the case of shifting from the “normal BB state” to the “AT ready state” or the like. Next, in step 4756, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not to shift to the AT state and the state related to the AT after the next game based on the satisfied AT state shiftable condition and the state related to the current AT. Next, in step 4758, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the “AT state” is newly determined as a state related to the AT. Note that in the third embodiment, Yes is made in step 4758 only at the time of so-called AT first time when the state related to AT shifts, such as “AT precursor state → AT preparation in progress → AT state”, and “AT state BB is won, and after that, when “AT is in preparation” and the state is shifted to “AT state”, it is configured to be No in step 4758 (in such a case, “Yes” It may be configured to set the initial number of games in the AT counter every time the state is shifted to “AT state”). In the case of Yes in step 4758, in step 4760, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the AT initial game number (in this example, 50) in the AT counter M60 when triggered by the new transition to the AT state. , Step 4762 is entered. Note that if the result is No in step 4752 or step 4758, the process proceeds to step 4762.

  Next, in step 4762, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current lottery state is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 4762, in step 4764, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a state promotion role (by winning, a small state that can shift from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state”). In this example, it is determined whether or not a weak watermelon, a strong watermelon, or a strong chance eye). In the case of Yes in step 4774, in step 4766, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the high probability state transition lottery table and executes a high probability state transition lottery to win based on the condition device number related to the game. Here, the upper right part of the figure is a high-probability state transition lottery table. In the third embodiment, the lottery state is changed from “low probability state” to “high probability state” in terms of weak watermelon, strong watermelon or strong chance. Depending on the condition device, the winning rate for weak watermelons is 1/10, the winning rate for strong watermelons is 1/2, and the winning rate for strong chances is 1/1. Winning rates for high-probability state lotteries are different. Next, in step 4768, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the high-probability transition lottery is won (for example, determines whether or not the latched random number value is within the winning range). . In the case of Yes in step 4768, in step 4770, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the lottery state after the next game is “high probability state”, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 4293).

  If No in step 4762, in step 4772, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current lottery state is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 4772, in step 4774, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates that the condition device related to the game is a state falling combination (a combination that can shift from a high probability state to a low probability state by displaying winning or stopping ). In the case of Yes in step 4774, in step 4776, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a low-probability state transition lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/7 in this example). Next, in step 4778, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the low-probability transition lottery is won (for example, whether or not the latched random number value is within the winning range). . In the case of Yes in step 4778, in step 4780, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the lottery state after the next game is “low probability state”, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 4293). In the third embodiment, the condition for shifting from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state” is not limited to this, and when another winning combination (for example, the condition device numbers 35 to 40) is won. Alternatively, a lottery for shifting from a “high probability state” to a “low probability state” with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game may be executed. In addition, when configured in such a manner, the low probability state transition lottery is not executed for 10 games after the transition to the “high probability state” (stay in the “high probability state” is guaranteed), You may comprise so that the lottery which shifts from a "high probability state" to a "low probability state" with a predetermined | prescribed probability (for example, 1/20) by every game after the said 10 game progress may be performed. Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 4292) also in the case of No in step 4774, step 4768, step 4772, step 4774 or step 4778. In the third embodiment, the lottery states of the “low probability state” and the “high probability state” are provided only in the “normal gaming state” (one of the states related to AT), and the “normal gaming state” If the state is related to an AT other than the above, No is made in steps 4762 and 4772, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4292).

  Next, FIG. 77 is an AT state transition diagram 1 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, “normal game state”, “AT precursor state”, “AT in preparation”, “AT in progress”, “normal BB internal game”, “normal BB state”, “AT in BB internal” There are eight AT-related states, “middle game” and “AT during BB state”, and the state related to AT shifts by satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure. For example, it is configured to shift to the “AT precursor state” by winning the AT in the “normal game state” (the AT winning flag is turned on).

  In addition, as a specific example of the state transition related to the AT, a “winning-G (strong watermelon)” condition device in which “1 type BB01” (BB) is selected in the “normal gaming state” is won. , If the BB is not won in the BB formation game (winning when “sheep / sheep / sheep” is stopped on the active line) {if strong watermelon is won (for example, “watermelon B on the active line”) When “Replay A / Replay A” is stopped), the state relating to AT shifts to “Normal BB inside game”. Next, when the BB is won by operating the stop button D40 (“Sheep / Sheep / Sheep” is stopped on the active line), the state shifts to the “Normal BB state”. On the other hand, when BB is won in the BB formation game (“Sheep / Sheep / Sheep” is stopped on the active line), the state related to AT changes from “Normal Game State” to “Normal BB Inside Game” in one game. ”And“ normal BB inside game ”is changed to“ normal BB state ”. In addition, when BB is won in the BB formation game, the state related to AT is changed from “normal game state” to “normal BB state” without going through “normal BB internal game”. Also good. In addition, in this “normal BB state”, when “seven” (replay 13), which will be won at 1/100, is won, after the end of the BB, it shifts to “AT ready” and “normal BB state” If the winning combination (including the re-game 13 (condition device number not shown)) is not won, the process shifts to the “normal gaming state” after the end of the BB. In this “normal game state”, the lottery state of the AT lottery is configured in two stages, a low probability state and a high probability state, and in the low probability state, the state promotion role (for example, condition device numbers 48 to 50) Is won, the high probability state transition lottery table is referred to and the high probability state transition lottery is executed based on the condition device number. If this high-probability transfer lottery is won, the lottery state will shift to a high-probability state. On the other hand, when the lottery state of the AT lottery is in the high probability state, when the state falling combination (for example, the condition device number 1) is won, the low probability state transition lottery in which 1/7 is won is executed. When this low probability transfer lottery is won, the lottery state shifts to a low probability state. Next, when the state related to the AT is “normal gaming state” and the lottery state is a high probability state and a strong watermelon is won (regardless of whether or not a prize is won), the high probability AT lottery table A is used. When the AT transition lottery to win in 2/3 is performed and the AT lottery is won, the state shifts to the “AT precursor state”. Next, the state related to the AT is “AT precursor state”, and when the predetermined number of games is consumed, the state shifts to “AT ready”. The method for determining the predetermined number of games that triggers the transition from “AT precursor state” to “AT ready” is a lottery (for example, a lottery from 0 to 32 games) at the time of the AT transition lottery by the strong watermelon. (If the number of fixed games is fixed, the focus is only on whether to shift to “AT ready” when the fixed number of games has elapsed. By providing a plurality of patterns for the number of games in the “AT precursor state”, the player can continue to be interested in whether or not the AT transfer lottery has been won). In this “AT preparation state”, the RT state stays at “RT3” (provided that the state shifts to “RT3”, the player accidentally switches to “RT3” without pushing navigation). In the situation where you stayed, if you shift to “AT ready”, you will not be able to shift to “AT state”) or you have ignored the push order navigation (for example, “Winning-B3 ”Is selected, and the player presses the stop button D40 in the order of“ right → middle → left ”even though the push order navigation notifies“ middle → left → right ”), the RT state is Although not “RT3”, the state shifts to “AT state”. The “AT state” shifts to the “normal gaming state” when the AT counter value becomes 0 (the remaining AT game number becomes 0). In addition, in the condition device of “winning-G (strong watermelon)” in which “1 type BB01” (BB) is selected in the “AT precursory state”, “AT in preparation”, or “AT state” In the case where the BB is won in the BB formation game and won (when the “sheep / sheep / sheep” is stopped on the active line) is not won (when the strong watermelon is won, for example, When “watermelon B / replay A / replay A” is stopped), the state related to AT shifts to “in-AT BB internal game”. Next, when the BB is won by operating the stop button D40 (“Sheep / Sheep / Sheep” is stopped on the active line), the state shifts to the “AT state BB state”. Thereafter, when BB ends, the process shifts to “AT ready”. In addition, after the “normal BB state” or the “AT state during BB state” is completed, when the continuation or winning of the AT is confirmed, the “AT precursor state” may be entered.

  As described above, the third embodiment is configured to shift to the “AT state” even when the push navigation is ignored in “AT in preparation”. When the reels are stopped in a stop order different from the corresponding navigation, even though a push order navigation for stopping and displaying the promoted re-gamer who will shift to “RT3” occurs in “AT ready” In addition, since it shifts to the “AT in progress” state, it is configured so that it is not possible to continue to stay in the “AT preparation” by ignoring the push order navigation. BB waits for the winning of the BB and prevents the player from shifting to a state related to the AT, which is more advantageous than the “normal BB state”, which is the “in-AT BB state”. It should be noted that the navigation is not limited to “RT3”. For example, even though the push navigation for stopping and displaying the promoted re-gamer who will shift from “RT1” to “RT2” has occurred, When the reels are stopped in a different stop order, or when the condition device numbers 42 to 47 are won by the winning lottery means (a combination of specific symbols (conditions for shifting to “RT1”) may be stopped and displayed) When the reels are stopped in the stopping order different from the navigation even though the pressing order navigation has occurred, it is possible to ignore the pressing order navigation by shifting to the “AT in-progress state”, and to “ It is configured so that it cannot continue to stay. Furthermore, as a mode in which the player ignores the push order navigation and shifts to the “AT state”, (1) When the push order navigation of both the re-game player and the push order bell is ignored, (2) the re-game When the push order navigation of a combination is ignored, (3) When either the replay combination or push order navigation of the push order bell is ignored, (4) Either of the replay combination or push order navigation is pushed Ignored, and when the RT state falls (for example, transition from “RT3” to “RT1”). Here, the pushing order bell mainly refers to the condition device numbers 42 to 47 (3 bells) having the possibility of transition of the RT state. For example, any of the condition device numbers 23 to 40 (7 bells) Even when Kana ignores the push order navigation when winning, it is not necessary to shift to the “AT state”. Of course, even if one of the condition device numbers 23 to 40 (7 bells) is won, even if the push order navigation is ignored, the state may be shifted to the “AT state”. In the third embodiment, the probability of the re-gamer when “RT2” is almost the same as “RT1”, but the expected game medal acquisition value when “RT2” is relative When the configuration is set so as to be high, the configuration in which the navigation state is shifted to the “AT state” even if the push order navigation is ignored is particularly effective in preventing capture. Although not shown, the state related to the AT after the RAM clear execution based on the setting change processing stays in the “normal game state”. Note that the description in the figure is merely a specific example. For example, the case where “re-game-C5” is won is illustrated as the state related to the AT only when “re-game-C5” is selected. Instead of migrating, only a specific example is described.

  Next, FIG. 78 is a flowchart of timer interruption processing according to the subroutine of step 4600 in the third embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 4040 or step 4104, and thereafter, a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example) To be periodically executed.

  First, in step 4602, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes processing at the start of interruption (for example, saving of data held in a register in the CPUMC, input port check of a power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 4604, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the power-off is currently detected (in the current interrupt process). In the case of No in step 4604, in step 4900, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a power-off process described later. On the other hand, if Yes in step 4604, in step 4606, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 4608, the CPU MC of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting door switch M10, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, the power-off detection signal, and the input acceptance sensor D10s. , Information relating to the detection of the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. (that is, whether or not these operation members are operated and the sensor detection state is Sampled at interrupt interval T).

  Next, in step 4610, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and according to the sampling result of each input port data, the door switch flag, the set door switch flag, the set key switch flag. (For example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously turned on over a plurality of samplings, the door switch flag is turned on, so that the front switch is not affected by noise.) It is also possible to detect that the door DU is open). Next, in step 4611, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a spinning drive control process (a process related to control of driving of the reel M50) for all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53). . Next, in step 4612, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If YES in step 4612, in step 4613, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the AT remaining game number (AT game number) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 4614. Note that if the result is No in step 4612, the process proceeds to step 4614. Next, in step 4614, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 4616, the CPUMC of the main control board M has all error flags turned off (not shown, inserted medal backflow flag, inserted number error flag, medal retention error flag, insertion error error flag, payout error). It is determined whether or not all flags relating to errors such as an error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, and a door switch flag are off. In the case of Yes in step 4616, in step 4618, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an error non-detection command (a command to the side of the sub control board S and that an error is not detected) ( For example, it is set in the register area), and the flow shifts to Step 4622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4616, in step 4620, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the side of the sub-control board S and related to the fact that an error is detected). (For example, set in the register area), the process proceeds to step 4622. In step 4620, information related to an error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. The error not detected command may be set only when the error is released from the state where the error has occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off). It is not necessary to execute the information setting process (S4618 may be omitted). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from a state where no error has occurred, or from the state where a first error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error has changed, such as a second error (for example, a payout medal retention error).

  Next, in step 4622, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a control command (command on the sub control board S side) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 4618 or step 4620, The set control command will be transmitted). Next, in step 4624, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the revolving game machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, the information related to the error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing error, a dispensing error, a setting door opening error, a closing reception sensor retention error, etc. The The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the setting door opening error is set and the setting door switch flag is turned on. If the insertion acceptance sensor detects that a game medal has accumulated, an error will be generated. Next, in step 4626, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the output data of the LEDs (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among a plurality of 7-segment LED units). Output a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 4628, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 4628 may not be executed. Next, in step 4630, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a soft random number management process (such as a process for updating a random value managed by software). Next, in step 4632, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has a region where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 4634, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not an abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). More specifically, the abnormality flag bit is set when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value. In the case of Yes in step 4634, in step 4636, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not an abnormal flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). Determine. In the case of Yes in step 4636, in step 4638, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an interrupt end process and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 4602). On the other hand, if NO in step 4634 or 4636, in step 4640, CPUMC of main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 4300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the non-recoverable error process described above.

  Next, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the power-off processing according to the subroutine of step 4900 in FIG. First, in step 4902, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores the stack pointer. Next, in step 4904, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the power-off process completed flag (for example, updates the power-off process completed flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 4906, the CPUMC of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and information for error detection based on the calculated checksum (for example, the calculation) In the checksum area, the lower 1 byte in the checksum or the complement thereof) is set. Next, in step 4912, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing of RAM, and proceeds to step 4914. Next, in step 4914, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for reset.

  Next, FIG. 80 shows an example of an image diagram of the push order display of the rotating type gaming machine P according to the third embodiment. The table in the figure shows the reel stop order and the instruction number indicated by the push order navigation to be executed (information relating to the push order. In this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S). It is a table | surface which shows a response | compatibility. For example, the instruction number when informing “middle → right → left” as the pressing order indicates “A5”. Next, the left side of the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device SG when the push order is “left → middle → right” (the corresponding instruction number is “A1”). Show. Here, the push order display device D270 of this example is a 7-segment display method and also serves as a payout number display device. When the medals are paid out, the number of medals paid out is displayed as a two-digit number on the push order display device D270. Here, even when the push order navigation is executed, if the display of the push order display device D270 is displayed as a two-digit numerical value, whether the display on the push order display device D270 indicates the number of medals to be paid out or not. It becomes difficult to determine whether the navigation display is displayed. For this reason, the push order display device D270 displays “=” in the left digit as “= 1” so that it can be distinguished whether the number of medals has been paid out or the push order navigation display. By configuring, when the display of the push order display device D270 is a two-digit numerical value, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out. As the display of the push order display device D270, the left side is “=” and the right side is a number. If there is, it is configured so that it can be determined that the display is a push order navigation, and it is configured to prevent misidentification of the player. Also, the right side of the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device SG when the push order is “middle → left → right” (the corresponding instruction number is “A3”). Yes. In addition, a combination with a pushing order (a condition device with a payout of medals among conditional devices with different winning combinations depending on the reel stop order, for example, a bell), and a re-playing combination with a pushing order (winning according to the reel stop order) The condition display of the instruction number of the condition device (replaying game combination) among the condition devices with different small roles to be performed may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is not limited to 7 segments. Instead, for example, an instruction may be made by turning on a plurality of LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to an instruction number using an LED display.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86, a control process executed on the sub-control board S side will be described. First, FIG. 81 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub control board S in the rotating game machine P according to the third embodiment. Here, the upper side of the figure is an initial process on the side of the sub control board S that is executed only when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, and the lower side of the figure is a sub control board that is repeatedly executed after the power to the gaming machine is turned on. Main processing. First, from the flowchart on the upper side of the figure, in step 6999, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs initial setting processing (for example, set of vector addresses (upper), calculation of checksum of all RWMs, RWM area After the initialization and the like are executed, the process proceeds to the sub-side routine on the lower side of step 7000 in FIG.

  Next, the sub-side routine on the lower side of FIG. First, in step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes an effect operation content determination process described later. Next, in step 7500, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a rendering operation control process to be described later, and repeats the process of returning to the top of this process flow. Hereinafter, each subroutine will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of effect operation content determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 7100 of FIG. 81 in the third embodiment. First, in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a start lever operation command (command set in step 4252 from the main control board M side, and is transmitted to the sub control board S side by the processing of step 4622. ) Is received. In the case of Yes in Step 7102, in Step 7104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S acquires information on the game (information on the winning combination and game state) transmitted from the main control board M side. Next, in step 7106, based on the acquired information on the game, an effect pattern (effect mode executed by the effect display device SG) related to the current game is set. Next, in step 7108, based on the acquired information on the game, an effect pattern related to other effects (game effect lamps, etc.) is set. Next, in step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the effect operation permission flag (a flag that is enabled when the effect operation control process in step 7500 is on), and performs the next process (step 7500). The process proceeds to (1).

  Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the rendering operation control process according to the subroutine of Step 7500 in FIG. 81 in the third embodiment. First, in step 7502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the effect operation permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 7502, in step 7504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the effect operation permission flag. Next, in step 7506, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the effect operation executing flag (a flag that is turned on when the effect operation control process is being executed), and proceeds to step 7508. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 7502, the process proceeds to step 7508.

  Next, in step 7508, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the effect operation executing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 7508, in step 7510, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the effect execution timing related to the current game has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 7510, in step 7512, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the effect pattern set in step 7106 of FIG. 82 on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to step 7514. Next, in step 7514, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the effect execution timing of other effects (game effect lamp D26, etc.) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 7514, in step 7516, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a command related to execution of a winning effect at the time of winning from the main control board M side (a command set in step 4272. It is determined whether or not a command transmitted to the control board S side is received. In the case of Yes in step 7516, in step 7518, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the received command, transmits a winning effect on the transparency effect display device TSG (if there is a prize, a transparency effect. The effect executed on the display device TSG) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 7520. Note that if the result is No in step 7516, the process proceeds to step 7520. Next, in step 7520, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a command related to execution of the transparency effect at the time of the template is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 7520, in step 7522, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is executed on the transparency effect display device TSG when the tempered transmission effect (when the BB role is tempered) based on the received command. The process proceeds to step 7526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 7520, in step 7524, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the effect pattern set in step 7108 of FIG. 82, and proceeds to step 7526. Note that if the result is No in step 7514, the process proceeds to step 7526. Next, in step 7526, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs an effect operation in the game (the effect operation set by the subroutine of step 7100, and an effect pattern related to the effect operation when the start lever D50 is operated, and It is determined whether or not an effect that can determine an effect execution timing has ended. In the case of Yes in step 7526, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the effect operation execution flag in step 7528, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 7000). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 7508 or step 7526, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 7000). As described above, in this example, the effects on the effect display device SG and the effects other than the transmissive effect display device TSG such as the game effect lamp D26 (effects other than the transmissive effect) are operated when the start lever D50 is operated. The effect pattern is determined, and the transparency effect (the transparency effect at the time of winning and the transparency effect at the time of tempering) is appropriately related to the performance execution timing related to the progress of the game transmitted from the main control board M side. Although the command is received and executed, the execution timing of each effect is not limited to this. It may be executed by receiving an effect on the effect display device SG (for example, push order navigation) or an execution command related to the effect execution timing of the game effect lamp D26, or when the start lever is operated. It is good also as a structure which sets an execution timing. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can perform the effect (for example, "push order navigation") performed on the effect display device SG on the transmissive effect display device TSG, and the transmissive effect display device TSG is used as the game effect lamp D26. Thus, it may be configured such that a winning effect can be performed. That is, as long as the production effect can be increased, it is not limited to the separation in this example.

  Next, FIG. 84 is a middle panel transparency effect image diagram in the third embodiment. First, the left side of the figure is a schematic diagram of a front view of the spinning cylinder type gaming machine P, and a transmissive effect display device TSG is provided in an area overlapping the position of the reel window D160. On the right side of the figure, the dotted line portion of the schematic diagram is enlarged and displayed, and an example of the transparency effect executed on the transparency effect display device TSG in front of the reel window region in time series from the upper stage to the lower stage. Show. In the upper right part of the figure, the “sheep” is stopped at the lower part of the left reel by operating the left stop button. Next, by operating the middle stop button, the “sheep” stops at the middle stage of the middle reel, the “sheep” stands on the diagonally upward line, and the tempered line is shown in front of the area between the reel and the reel 3 Light is emitted (displayed) on the transmission effect display device TSG in a line shape. In this example, the display of the temper line is executed only for the BB combination. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the AT lottery combination in which the right acquisition lottery for shifting to the “AT state” is executed ( The “tempered watermelon”, “weak watermelon”, etc.) may be configured to display the tempering line. In addition, the display mode of the effect display related to the tempering line according to the expectation level or the AT winning rate (high probability state or low probability state) that the BB role is aligned (a big hit is executed) It may be configured to be able to change (color, blinking display, etc.). In addition, the effect around the reel is not limited to these triggers, for example, in the reel start wait period, in the operation invalid period before the reel drive mode becomes constant speed, for example, the reel back lamp is reduced, It may be configured such that an effect (notice) such as a flash is given and an expectation of the winning combination of the BB combination and the BB combination winning in the game is expected.

  Next, when the right stop button is operated, the “sheep” stops on the tempering line at the upper stage of the right reel, and an indication that the BB role is aligned (in the part between the reel and the reel as viewed from the player). The overlapping portion of the transmission effect display device TSG in front overlaps the light). In this image diagram, only the winning combination of the BB combination has been described. However, the winning combination that triggers the transmission effect at the time of winning is not limited to the BB combination, and the winning display can be executed also in other winning combinations. In this case, the display mode is not limited to changing the color depending on the winning combination or winning lines, and the effect display may be executed. In addition, even if the winning combination has not been paid out, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a similar winning combination effect is executed for an important winning combination (for example, a winning trigger for shifting to a high probability state). However, it is preferable to ensure visibility from the player of the symbol on the reel when viewed by the player (for example, the transmissive effect display device TSG is not provided in front of the symbol display position of the reel, or It is impossible to display by not forming the LED element or the conductive pattern). On the other hand, a reel that displays an auxiliary decorative design such as a sub reel can be configured to perform a transparency effect over the entire front surface of the reel.

  By configuring as described above, according to the rotating type gaming machine according to the third embodiment, an effect synchronized with the behavior on the reel (in this example, at the time of the BB temper and at the time of winning) It can be executed on the transmission effect display device TSG at a timing in accordance with the execution of the game. Note that the opportunity for executing the transparency effect (the effect displayed on the transparency effect display device TSG) is not limited to the time of a tempering or winning. For example, when a predetermined stop button D40 determined by lottery or the like is operated, an effect suggesting a winning combination may be executed as a transparency effect.

(Modification 1 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, it is configured to ensure the visibility from the player of the symbols on the reel in the effect around the middle panel D110 (particularly the reel window D160). The configuration related to the effect using the display device TSG is not limited to this. Another example of the effect in the vicinity of the middle panel D110 will be described in detail below as a first modification from the third embodiment.

  In addition, in the rotating type gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment, the transmissive effect display device TSG includes the middle panel D110 in addition to the surface of the region of the middle panel D110 overlapping the position of the reel window D160. The decorative cover member DC of the figure case FC (the case having a translucent decorative cover member DC that can store the figure and that can be visually recognized by the player) is provided on the right side of the figure.

  FIG. 85 is an image view 2 of an intermediate panel transparency effect {effect on the transparency effect display device TSG executed at the front (up) of the middle panel} according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. First, the left side of the figure is a schematic diagram of a front view of the rotating type gaming machine P. As described above, the area of the middle panel including the area overlapping the position of the reel window D160, and the decorative cover member DC of the figure case FC. Is provided with a transmission effect display device TSG. On the right side of the figure, the dotted line portion (middle panel D110 portion) of the schematic diagram is enlarged and displayed, and an example of the transparency effect executed in the middle panel region from the upper stage to the lower stage is shown. . In the upper right part of the figure, the “sheep” is stopped at the lower part of the left reel by operating the left stop button. At this time, the figure in the figure case FC installed on the right side of the reel window is not illuminated and is difficult to see. Next, by operating the middle stop button, the “sheep” stops at the middle stage of the middle reel, the “sheep” stands on the diagonally upward line, and the tempered line is shown in front of the area between the reel and the reel 3 The transmission effect display device TSG emits light (displays) in a line shape.

  Next, when the right stop button is operated, the “sheep” stops on the tempering line at the upper stage of the right reel, and an indication that the BB role is aligned (in the part between the reel and the reel as viewed from the player). The overlapping transmission effect display device TSG part emits light strongly). At the same time, the transmission effect display device TSG provided on the cover member on the surface of the figure case emits light to illuminate the figure in the figure case brightly, and at the same time, the characters “awakening” are displayed. In this example, the transmissive effect display device TSG provided in the figure case starts when the BB role is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the production can be started when the player moves to or when the number of AT games is added and a lottery is won. You may comprise so that a display of a color and a character can be changed with the game state (state regarding AT, state regarding RT) after the said transfer, and the ease of winning the AT lottery for each state regarding AT.

  Thus, according to the transmission effect display device TSG of this example, since the light emitting member 1000 has flexibility, it can be installed on the surface of a curved member such as the cover member of the figure case FC. . In addition, if the size and the conductive pattern of the transmissive effect display device TSG are configured so that the edge of the cover can be a contact point for electric conduction, power is supplied by attachment to the gaming machine, and the place where it can be used It is difficult to be limited, and it is possible to provide a figure or a role in the space where the substrate is provided.

  In addition, as a specific configuration when installed on the middle panel D110 as in this example, the middle panel D110 has a two-layer structure, and a transparent protective panel and a transparent effect display are displayed in order from the front as viewed from the player. It is good also as a structure set as the apparatus TSG and the panel with a decoration printing (panel which printed the title of the character or the gaming machine). In addition, it is provided in front of a display for production on the middle panel (which may be another panel) (for example, a bonus notification lamp (a lamp for notifying a bonus winning), a display lamp indicating a gaming state such as an AT state, etc.). Alternatively, the transmissive effect display device TSG may be applied as an alternative to the input number display, replay, start, weight lamp, and the like. In addition, it is applied to the portion of the console D190, applied to the periphery of the operation members (for example, the bet button D220, the medal slot D170, the start lever D50) related to the game, or the surface of the operation member, and then operated. The operation member may be configured to emit light.

  With the above-described configuration, in the swivel type gaming machine according to the third embodiment, various effects can be achieved by the transmissive effect display device TSG on the middle panel D110 around the reel window where the player's line of sight concentrates. Can be executed.

(Fourth embodiment)
Here, in the third embodiment, the middle panel D110 around the reel window can be used to produce a synergistic effect synchronized with the behavior of the reel M50 and the start of execution of the special game using the transmissive effect display device TSG. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Therefore, another example of the structure of the effect produced by the transmissive effect display device TSG on the middle panel D110 will be described as a fourth embodiment, and only differences from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (fourth sheet) according to the subroutine of step 4200 in FIG. 61 according to the fourth embodiment. Changes from the third embodiment are step 4292-1 (fourth) and step 4292-2 (fourth), that is, in step 4292, the CPUSC of the sub control board S subtracts 1 from the AT counter value. After that, in step 4292-1 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the game number addition lottery (lever game number addition execution process or winning game number addition execution process, and AT addition game) It is determined whether or not the game is won) when the number of games of 1 or more is selected. In the case of Yes in step 4292-1 (fourth), in step 4292-2 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a command related to execution of AT addition transparency effect {command to the sub-control board S side Yes, it is a command set in step 4292-2 (fourth). In step 4622, a command transmitted to the sub-control board S side is set, and the process proceeds to step 4700. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4292-1 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 4700. By configuring in this way, in the winning game extra execution process in step 6300, when the game number extra lottery is won, the AT extra transparency effect (transparent if the game extra extra lottery is won in the AT state) The transparency effect executed on the sexual effect display device TSG) can be executed by the transmissive effect display device.

  In this example, the winning by the extra lottery for the number of games that triggers the AT extra transparency effect is both at the time of winning and the operation of the start lever D50, but is not limited to this, and at the time of winning It may be configured such that the AT addition transparency effect can be executed only at the time of winning the lottery with the number of games, or only at the time of winning the lottery with the number of games at the time of lever. Further, in that case, it is not limited to a configuration in which an AT extra transparency effect is always executed at the time of winning the extra lottery, referring to the table according to the extra number of games or according to the extra number of games A lottery with different winning probabilities (the higher the number of games added, the higher the winning probability) may be performed, and only when winning is selected, an AT extra transparency effect may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further enhance the sense of exhilaration when a number of additional games are successfully won.

  Next, FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 4750 in FIG. 86 in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the third embodiment is step 4761 (fourth), that is, in step 4760, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the AT initial game number (50 in this example) in the AT counter M60. After that, in step 4761 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a command related to the AT state transition transmission effect {command to the sub control board side, and is set in step 4761 (fourth). In step 4622, the command to be transmitted to the sub control board S is set, and the process proceeds to step 4762. Here, the AT state transition transparency effect is an effect that is executed on the transparency effect display device TSG by lottery winning when the state related to AT from the next game is shifted to the “AT state”. . By configuring in this way, the AT state is newly determined as the state relating to the AT, that is, the AT state state transparent transmission effect at the timing when the AT precursor state ends and the next game shifts to the AT state. Can be executed.

  Next, FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the rendering operation control process according to the subroutine of Step 7500 in FIG. 81 according to the fourth embodiment. Changes from the third embodiment are step 7530 (fourth) to step 7534 (fourth) and step 8000 (fourth), that is, in step 7528, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is changed to the main control board. Based on the command related to the transmission effect at the time of tempering from the M side, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is performing the AT from the main control board M side in step 7530 (fourth) after executing the tempering effect at the tempering time. A command related to the state transition transparency effect {a command to the sub-control board S side, a command set at step 4761 (fourth), and a command transmitted to the sub-control board S side at step 4622} It is determined whether or not it has been received. In the case of Yes in step 7530 (fourth), in step 8000 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes an AT state transition transparency effect execution process described later, and proceeds to step 7532 (fourth). To do. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 7530 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 7532 (fourth).

  Next, in step 7532 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a command that is set in the AT additional transmission effect execution {step 4292-2 (fourth) from the main control board M side. In step 4622, it is determined whether or not a command transmitted to the sub-control board S side is received. This command is set in step 4292-2 (fourth), and in step 4622, a command transmitted to the sub-control board S side is set. In the case of Yes in step 7532 (fourth), in step 7534 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S, based on the received command (command related to execution of AT addition transparency effect), AT addition transparency effect. (For example, the effect of displaying the added number of games as a number on the transparency effect display device TSG) is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 7000 is executed again). With this configuration, at an appropriate timing in the AT state (when the start lever D50 is operated, when the stop button D40 is operated, when the AT lottery is won, when the AT precursor state ends when the AT state transitions, etc.) By transmitting the command transmission or execution timing in advance, it is possible to execute the transparency effect display processing (AT state transition transparency effect and AT added transparency effect).

  Next, FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the AT state transition transparency effect execution control process according to the subroutine of Step 8000 (fourth) in FIG. 88 according to the fourth embodiment. First, in step 8002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a lottery drawing for determining whether or not the AT state transition transparency effect is won by 1/3. Next, in Step 8004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a lottery drawing for determining whether or not the AT state transition transparency effect can be performed has been won. In the case of Yes in Step 8004, in Step 8006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a button repeated hitting effect (an effect for prompting button hitting, for example, “PUSH !!” is displayed in dot display). Then, the process proceeds to step 8008. Next, in Step 8008, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button has been pressed a predetermined number of times (whether or not it has been repeatedly hit). In the case of Yes in step 8008, in step 8010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the button continuous striking effect successful effect on the transparency effect display device TSG, and proceeds to the next process {step 7532 (fourth) process}. Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 8008, in step 8012, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined period (predetermined period since the start of the button striking effect) has elapsed. In the case of Yes in step 8012, in step 8014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the AT revival winning transparency effect (if the sub input button SB has not been operated a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period, the AT revival winning transparency The effect) is executed by the transparency effect display device TSG, and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 7532 (fourth)}. If NO in step 8012, the process proceeds to step 8008. If No in step 8004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the AT winning effect on the effect display device SG in step 8016, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 7532 (fourth)}. To do. The AT winning effect is an effect of notifying that the state is to be shifted to the “AT state”, and the transparency effect display device TSG is selected because the AT state state transmitting transparency effect execution lottery in step 8004 is not selected. Instead, it is an effect displayed on the effect display device SG. Further, in this example, only when the transition to the “AT state” is confirmed and the AT state transition transparency effect execution availability determination lottery is won, the button repeated effect can be executed on the transparency effect display device TSG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the button repeated striking effect can be executed even when the transition to the “AT state” is not confirmed (so-called “gase effect”). . Further, the expected value of the number of added games is set in stages, and the winning probability of the state transition transparency effect execution possibility determination in AT state is set such that the higher the expected value of the added number of games is, the higher the winning probability is. Also good.

  FIG. 90 is a middle panel transparency effect image diagram 3 in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. As in FIG. 85, a transparent effect display device TSG that includes the surface of the area of the middle panel D110 and that overlaps the position of the reel window D160 is provided, and the middle panel D110 portion is enlarged from the upper left side. And shows an example of a transmission effect that is executed in the area of the middle panel D110 in time series. First, in the upper left part of the figure, “weak watermelons”, which are AT lotteries for normal levers, are aligned diagonally upward. Next, a message instructing to repeatedly hit the sub input button SB is displayed on the transparency effect display device TSG disposed in front of the reel window D160. Next, when the player repeatedly hits the sub input button, a part of the character “V”, which is a dot display, appears on the transparency effect display device. It should be noted that at the timing when “PUSH!”, Which is a message for instructing to repeatedly press the sub input button SB, is displayed, all reels are stopped, and the reel back lamp (not shown, but lit) This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the picture on the reel. The lamp on the far side of the reel as viewed from the player is turned off, so the “PUSH !!” character is clearly displayed. It can be visually recognized.

  Next, when the player further strikes the sub input button, the entire “V” display appears on the transmissive effect display device TSG. Next, characters “ATGET !!” indicating that the state related to the AT has shifted to the “AT state” is displayed on the transparency effect display device TSG. Note that the display of “ATGET !!!!” is configured so that it can be clearly recognized by turning off the reel back lamp, similarly to the display of “PUSH !!” described above. The next game is started and a small role in which the right reel is in the first stop is established. As a push order navigation in the “AT state”, an instruction to stop the right reel is given on the transparent effect display device. As an indication to that effect, the upper and lower areas of the right reel in the transparency effect display device TSG blink. As described above, since the reel can rotate at the timing of displaying the push order navigation, the area overlapping the effective line (in this example, one line rising to the right) in the transparency effect display device TSG relates to the push order navigation. It is desirable that the display is not displayed, and in the figure, the player is instructed to indicate a reel to be stopped by blinking the vicinity of the reel to be instructed as push order navigation. Note that even if the area overlaps the reel in the transmissive effect display device TSG, the push order navigation may be displayed as long as it does not overlap the effective line. In the fourth embodiment, the “push order navigation” which is configured to be executed on the effect display device SG in the third embodiment is configured to be executable on the transparency effect display device TSG. ing. By configuring as described above, the player can perform the AT-related state and the effect related to the AT addition lottery in the “AT state” while simultaneously viewing the symbols on the reel from the reel window while seeing the symbols on the reel. The above effect can be visually recognized, and attention can be paid to the behavior of the reel without shifting the line of sight to the effect display device SG (for example, the upper panel D130 or the sub liquid crystal) provided separately. Moreover, if it is a dot display like this example, it can produce without disturbing the visibility of the symbol on a reel. Note that the display mode on the transmissive effect display device TSG is not limited to the dot display as in this example, and an image (such as a moving image) different from the dot display may be displayed. However, it does not have to be present (an aspect in which the design can be seen through the video). It is not limited to a mode in which characters appear gradually, but may be a mode in which the color (the characters and the entire reel window) changes.

  With the above-described configuration, in the swivel-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, a state of AT and a state of transparency that is installed on the middle panel D110 for the state of transparency relating to the AT addition lottery is displayed. The configuration is such that it can be executed on the device TSG, and a synergistic effect can be provided mainly in association with the progress of the game in the “AT state”. Note that the transmission effect relating to the AT addition lottery is not limited to the effect on the middle panel D110, and may be performed on the upper panel D130 and the lower panel D140. In that case, you may comprise so that a synergistic effect can be performed by installing the permeation | transmission effect display apparatus TSG in the surface of the effect display apparatus SG, or the front. In addition, when a sub reel (reel for displaying an auxiliary decorative design) is provided, a transmissive effect display device TSG may be provided in front of the sub reel to create a synergistic effect with the effect of the sub reel.

  Next, FIG. 91 is an image diagram of the upper panel transparency effect {the effect on the transparency effect display device TSG executed at the front (up) of the upper panel} in the swivel type game machine applicable to this example. It is an example. In the fourth embodiment, the transparency effect display device TSG is disposed around the middle panel D110, and the reel window D160 and the like that can be visually recognized without moving the player's line of sight are described in detail. The place where the device TSG can be applied is not limited to the periphery of the middle panel D110. Since the transmission effect display device TSG in this example does not require a light source arrangement space, it is possible to arrange an accessory or a mechanism in the light source arrangement space. As an example of such a configuration, the case where the transmissive effect display device TSG is arranged on the upper panel D130 will be described in detail below.

  First, the left side of the figure shows a schematic view from the front side of the swivel-type gaming machine, and a transmissive effect display device TSG is provided in an area overlapping the position of the upper panel D130, and the upper side from the upper right side of the figure. The panel D130 portion is enlarged and displayed, and an example of the transparency effect executed in the area of the upper panel D130 in time series from the upper stage to the lower stage is shown. In the upper right side of the figure, in the space inside the panel, a hammer accessory (a kind of movable object accessory YK) is provided on the right side surface, and it is housed via a transmissive effect display device TSG. The hammer is visible. Next, for example, an AT lottery combination (“strong watermelon”, “weak watermelon”, etc.) is prepared, an instruction to press the sub input button SB is displayed (similar to FIG. 90), and the player presses the sub input button SB. The hammer housed on the right side is driven, and the effect of hitting the upper panel D130 from the back side is started. At the same time, an image of cracks generated by being hit by a hammer is displayed on the transmission effect display device TSG.

  Furthermore, when the hammer strikes the upper panel D130 by repeatedly hitting the sub input button SB, cracks on the transparency effect display device TSG increase. Then, after the effect that the upper panel D130 is destroyed is displayed on the transmissive effect display device TSG, the transmissive effect display device TSG goes dark, and the letter “V” is displayed. By constructing as described above, the driving of the movable body accessory YK arranged in the space behind the transmissive effect display device TSG and the effect of the transmissive effect display device TSG are synchronized, and an unprecedented effect Can be created. Further, when the transmission effect display device TSG of the present example is more flexible, the transmission effect display device TSG can be pasted on the surface of the movable body accessory YK to provide a further synergistic effect. You may comprise. Note that the mechanism and the accessory provided inside the gaming machine are not limited as long as spatial restrictions permit, and the sub-reel (reel installed in addition to the main reel, the game result is displayed on the main reel. On the other hand, the sub-reel may be used in a configuration that enhances the production) or a configuration in which a speaker or the like is provided. In addition, an effect display device SG (a display device that does not have transparency by liquid crystal or the like) is provided on the upper panel, and a transparency effect display device TSG is attached to the back surface or the like of the cover member to synergize with the effect display device SG. It is good also as a structure which performs a specific production.

  Next, FIG. 92 is an image diagram of the lower panel transparency effect {the effect on the transparency effect display device TSG executed at the front (upper) of the lower panel} in the swivel game machine applicable to this example. It is an example. In FIG. 91, an example in which the transmissive effect display device TSG is arranged on the upper panel D130 has been described in detail. However, the transmissive effect display device TSG can also be applied to the lower panel D140. Since the transmission effect display device TSG in this example does not require a space for light source arrangement, an accessory (a fixed object such as a movable object YK or a figure imitating a character) is provided in the light source arrangement space. And mechanisms can be arranged. Therefore, an example of a configuration in which the transmissive effect display device TSG is applied to the lower panel D140 will be described in detail below.

  First, the left side of the figure shows a schematic view from the front side of the swivel type gaming machine, and a transmissive effect display device TSG is provided in an area overlapping with the position of the lower panel D140. The panel D140 portion is enlarged and displayed, and an example of the transparency effect executed in the area of the lower panel D140 in time series from the upper stage to the lower stage is shown. In the upper right side of the figure, a transmissive effect display device TSG is provided on the surface of the lower panel D140, and a woofer (speaker) installed therein can be visually recognized. Next, the player executes the operation of the start lever D50, and the characters “Intense heat” are displayed on the transmission effect display device, indicating that the expectation of the big hit is high. Next, when all the stop buttons have been operated and all the reels have been stopped, the text “BONUS confirmed” is displayed on the transparent effect display device as an indication that the big hit has been confirmed, and then BB starts. To do.

  The mechanism that can be installed on the back side of the lower panel D140 is not limited to the woofer of this example as long as the space restriction of the installation location allows. The movable body accessory YK may be installed, or as a configuration further including the effect display device SG, a transmissive effect display device TSG may be arranged on the cover member or the like to produce a synergistic effect. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which inserts the transparency production | presentation display apparatus TSG on the front of the decoration sheet of the lower panel D140, and can perform the transmission production (production in which one part or all light-emits) on a decoration sheet.

  Further, the place where the transmissive effect display device TSG is installed is not limited to the above-described example, and can be applied to any place in consideration of the flexibility of the light emitting member 1000 to be used and the securing of the power supply source. It is. For example, the present invention may be applied to a game effect lamp D26 (base lamp such as a side lamp, lamps of various decorative members, etc.), and may be configured to be synchronized with other effects (sounds or effects on an effect display device). Good.

  As an example of an aspect of installing the transmissive effect display device TSG of this example, each panel (upper panel D130, middle panel D110, lower panel D140) on the game board of the pachinko gaming machine or on the back side, or the revolving game machine ) On the back side, etc., and a structure that can display the light source or the effect in water may be applied as a configuration in which the transmission effect display device TSG is sandwiched between resin films or the like. In that case, the water may be slightly clouded or a floating substance that reflects light may be provided to make the light emission effect stand out.

  The transmissive performance display device TSG of the present example has a flexible structure, and is capable of effect display even in a state where a notch or the like is made rather than simple bending due to flexibility, so that unevenness is complicated. It can also be applied to the surface of a complicated shaped object. When combined with the feature that a space for light source arrangement is not necessary, the effect display device can be applied to parts that could not be applied so far (the surface of a figure, the surface of an accessory, etc.).

  In addition, as an aspect using the flexibility of the transmissive effect display device TSG, reuse of the transmissive effect display device TSG can be cited. The transmissive performance display device TSG itself is expensive, and there is a problem of disposal of the used metal (indium, tin, etc.), so that it can be reused is a great industrial advantage. As a specific aspect, since the transmission effect display device TSG has sufficient flexibility, it can be used by being folded into a desired size, and thus applied to a display range of a certain gaming machine. The transmissive effect display device TSG can be used again as a display range of another gaming machine different from the certain gaming machine only by changing the size of folding. That is, even if it is the housing | casing (box which comprises the apparatus outside) which concerns on another game machine, it is possible to reuse the transparency production | presentation display apparatus TSG of this example many times without a problem.

<<< Mode to suppress electromagnetic waves >>>
As described above, the transmissive effect display device TSG of the present example can be suitably applied to pachinko gaming machines and rotating type gaming machines. However, as described above, it is assumed that the transmission effect display device TSG generates a considerable amount of electromagnetic waves due to the execution of the transmission effect and affects the control of other devices. In this case, since the transmissive effect display device TSG needs to ensure translucency (visibility) due to the nature of the effect, the transmissive effect display device TSG is covered as a preventive measure against the generation of electromagnetic waves. A configuration that attenuates electromagnetic waves by installing a metal plate or the like cannot be easily adopted. Therefore, the aspect which the gaming machine of this example should take will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 93 is a schematic view showing a state in which the intensity of electromagnetic waves is attenuated by an electromagnetic wave suppressing member DY for suppressing arrival of electromagnetic waves such as a conductive case, a conductive plate, and a conductive film.

  As shown in FIG. 93, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, the electromagnetic waves are remarkably suppressed by conductive materials such as a conductive case, a conductive plate, and a conductive film. An electromagnetic wave suppressing member DY for attenuating the electromagnetic wave such as a conductive case, a conductive plate, and a conductive film to attenuate the arrival of the electromagnetic wave is grounded in advance (not shown). The emitted electromagnetic wave can be discharged as a current. Any material can be used as long as it can attenuate the intensity of the electromagnetic wave by electric discharge through the conductive material.

  For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, the main control board M, the sub control board S, the prize ball payout control board KH, the electrical components, etc. are not affected by the electromagnetic waves, It is possible to perform an original operation without malfunctioning, and to prevent a disadvantage to a player or a store.

  Next, FIG. 94A shows that a member for suppressing the arrival of electromagnetic waves, such as a conductive case, a conductive plate, and a conductive film, is not provided, and the transmission effect display device TSG is separated from various control boards. It is the schematic which shows the state by which electromagnetic waves attenuate | damp and the arrival of electromagnetic waves is suppressed by being arrange | positioned at the position which carried out.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (A), the transmissive effect display device TSG is arranged at a position separated from various control boards, and even when an electromagnetic wave is emitted from the transmissive effect display device TSG, Is gradually attenuated by diffusion.

  For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, the main control board M, the sub control board S, the prize ball payout control board KH, the electrical components, etc. are not affected by the electromagnetic waves, It is possible to perform an original operation without malfunctioning, and to prevent a disadvantage to a player or a store.

  FIG. 94B shows a case where a member for attenuating electromagnetic waves such as a conductive case, a conductive plate, and a conductive film to suppress arrival of the electromagnetic waves is not provided, and the transmissive effect display device TSG has various control boards. It is the schematic which shows the state which is arrange | positioned in the position near from and the electromagnetic wave is not fully attenuated.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (B), the transmissive effect display device TSG is disposed at a position close to various control boards, and when an electromagnetic wave is emitted from the transmissive effect display device TSG, the electromagnetic wave is sufficiently generated. It cannot be attenuated.

  For this reason, when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, the main control board M, the sub-control board S, the prize ball payout control board KH, the electrical components, etc. are affected by the electromagnetic waves and malfunction. In this case, the original operation cannot be performed, and there is a possibility that the player or the store may be disadvantaged.

  As described above, in order to attenuate the electromagnetic wave emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG and suppress the arrival of the electromagnetic wave, (1) the distance between the transmission effect display device TSG and various control boards is a certain distance or more. (2) A member for suppressing electromagnetic wave arrival by attenuating electromagnetic waves, such as a conductive case, a conductive plate, and a conductive film, is provided between the transparent effect display device TSG and various control boards. By being configured in this way, it is possible to reduce the influence of electromagnetic waves emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG.

  Here, the configuration for attenuating the electromagnetic wave as described above will be specifically described in detail for each of the pachinko gaming machine and the revolving type gaming machine.

<< Specific examples of electromagnetic wave attenuation in the case of Pachinko machines >>
As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board M of the pachinko gaming machine is disposed on the left side of the lower part of the pachinko gaming machine. As described above, the main control board M is required to have a translucency (transparency) case. Therefore, the main control board M is housed and arranged in a case having both conductivity and translucency, regardless of the arrangement and distance of the surrounding transmission effect display device TSG.

  The sub-main control unit SM of the pachinko gaming machine is arranged on the left side of the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine, and the sub-sub control unit SS is arranged in the center of the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine. According to the arrangement and distance of the surrounding transmissive effect display device TSG, these can be arranged by appropriately using a conductive case, a conductive plate, and a conductive film. For example, when the transmission effect display device TSG is disposed at a distance of less than 5 cm, it is stored in a case having conductivity, and when the transmission effect display device TSG is disposed at a distance of less than 10 cm. When the conductive effect display device TSG is disposed at a distance of less than 30 cm, the conductive film can be appropriately attached. Note that the conductive case, conductive plate, and conductive film must be grounded by a reinforcing sheet metal or the like of the adjacent frame.

  Further, when the transmissive effect display device TSG is arranged at a distance of 30 cm or more, the electromagnetic wave emitted from the transmissive effect display device TSG is attenuated to some extent, so that the conductive case, conductive Either a plate or a conductive film may not be used.

  The determination of the distance from the transmission effect display device TSG is appropriately performed according to the intensity and frequency of electromagnetic waves emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, electromagnetic waves emitted from other devices, reflection of electromagnetic waves, and the like. Change to

  Furthermore, considering the direction of electromagnetic waves emitted from the transmissive effect display device TSG as well as the distance to the transmissive effect display device TSG, select one of the conductive case, conductive plate, and conductive film. May be. In the case where the electromagnetic wave is disposed in a range of −10 ° to + 10 ° with the direction in which the electromagnetic wave is most strongly emitted as a center, it is preferable to use a conductive case. Moreover, when arrange | positioning in the range of -30 degrees--10 degrees and +10 degrees-+30 degrees centering on the direction where electromagnetic waves are emitted most strongly, it is preferable to cover using a conductive plate. Furthermore, when the electromagnetic wave is arranged in the range of −60 ° to −30 ° and + 30 ° to + 60 ° around the direction in which the electromagnetic wave is most strongly emitted, it is preferable to appropriately paste a conductive film or the like. . Furthermore, when it is less than −60 ° and greater than + 60 °, the electromagnetic wave hardly travels, and it is not necessary to use a conductive plate or a conductive film. In consideration of the possibility that the intensity and the traveling direction of the electromagnetic wave may change, even when it is less than −60 ° and greater than + 60 °, it may be attenuated by using a conductive plate or a conductive film.

  Similarly, with respect to the prize ball payout control board KH, depending on the intensity, frequency and direction of electromagnetic waves emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, and the mounting state of other devices, conductive cases, conductive plates, conductive What is necessary is just to change and apply a property film etc. suitably. The conductive case, conductive plate, and conductive film are preferably disposed along a surface extending in a direction substantially perpendicular to the direction in which electromagnetic waves are most strongly emitted.

<< Specific Example of Electromagnetic Wave Attenuation for Retractable Pachislot Machine P >>
As shown in FIG. 44, the main control board M of the spinning reel type gaming machine P is arranged from the center of the uppermost part of the spinning reel type gaming machine P to the right side. As described above, the main control board M is required to have a translucency (transparency) case. Therefore, the main control board M is housed and arranged in a case having both conductivity and translucency, regardless of the arrangement and distance of the surrounding transmission effect display device TSG.

  Further, the sub-control board S of the spinning machine P is disposed on the left side of the spinning machine P along the vertical direction. Furthermore, the medal payout device H is disposed at a substantially central portion at the lower part of the spinning cylinder type gaming machine P. Like various devices of pachinko gaming machines, these are conductive depending on the intensity, frequency and direction of electromagnetic waves emitted from the transmissive effect display device TSG, electromagnetic waves emitted from other devices, reflection of electromagnetic waves, etc. What is necessary is just to change suitably the case which has, a conductive plate, a conductive film, etc., and to apply.

  The transmissive effect display device TSG can be used in place of the effect display device so far in both pachinko gaming machines and in the revolving game machine P, but takes measures to sufficiently attenuate the electromagnetic waves described above. Is preferred. In addition, since the transmission effect display device TSG has flexibility, when used in place of the previous effect display device, both ends of the transmission effect display device TSG are sandwiched between the transmission effect display devices TSG. By attaching a support member that can support the whole instead of the effect display device, the transparency effect display device TSG can be arranged. The transmissive effect display device TSG can freely adjust the area actually used and can be recycled. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine and the spinning-type gaming machine P, various usage methods for providing various effects are assumed by using the transmissive effect display device TSG. It is preferable that the conductive case, conductive plate, conductive film, etc. are appropriately changed and applied in accordance with the intensity, frequency and direction of electromagnetic waves emitted from the effect display device TSG, and the mounting state of other devices. . It should be noted that, in both the pachinko gaming machine and the revolving type gaming machine P, the position where the various control boards such as the main control board M are arranged is merely an example, and there is no problem even if it is changed. It may be arranged as appropriate in consideration of the position of the arrangement, or the conductive case, conductive plate, conductive film, etc. may be appropriately changed and applied.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine and the revolving type gaming machine according to this example, (1) a transmissive effect display device TSG, (2) a device that needs to suppress electromagnetic waves, (3) A device that shields electromagnetic waves (a suppression mechanism) is used as a constituent element. These constituent elements are summarized as a list in FIGS.

Next, FIG. 95 is a list of installation parts of (A) the transmission effect display device TSG related to the pachinko gaming machine. Hereinafter, the arrangement target, the arrangement location, and the contents are listed.
(A1)
(Target) Glass window (transparent plate D16)
(Placement location) Place (paste) on the back of the glass plate. You may arrange | position to the whole surface of the back surface of a glass plate, or only one part.
What is necessary is just to determine the position and magnitude | size which arrange | position a transparency production | presentation display film according to the arrangement | positioning state, shape, and magnitude | size of various production | presentation members (production | presentation display apparatus and an accessory) in a game board.
(Contents) Information such as characters and figures for instructing the player is displayed.
A display that covers a part of the front of the effect display device, the accessory, and the decorative member can be performed without being hindered by the effect display device, the accessory, and the decorative member.
By displaying a superimposed image while covering the image to be displayed on the effect display device, an effect display can be performed supplementarily.
For example, it is possible to display a tempering line indicating that the tempering has been performed, a hold display and a change display, a V display at the time of a button hit effect, and the like.
In addition, it is preferable to arrange a transmissive effect display film and display various types of information so that the player can clearly see the type and movement of the symbols displayed on the effect display device.
On the other hand, a transmissive effect display film may be arranged so as to display various types of information superimposed on the types and movements of symbols displayed on the effect display device.
Similarly, a transmissive effect display film may be arranged so that various types of information are displayed by being superimposed or synchronized in accordance with the action of an accessory.
(A2)
(Placement target) Game board (placement place) Place (paste) on the back of the game board.
It may be affixed on the entire back side of the game board or only on a part of the back side. It is preferable to affix it so that it does not overlap with the effect display device (so as not to interfere). Various decorative members and accessories may be pasted so as to be superimposed or not superimposed. When pasted so as to overlap, it is possible to emit light so as to overlap the light emission of the decorative member or the accessory. When pasted so as not to overlap, it is possible to prevent the decorative member and the accessory from being emitted.
It should be noted that it may be placed on the surface of the game board as long as it does not hinder the ball or the accessory.
(Contents) Light can be emitted from the back side of a translucent game board, and various information such as characters and figures can be displayed through the game board so as to be visible.
Various information can be displayed by emitting light at a position that does not overlap (does not interfere with) the effect display device, the accessory or the decorative member.
Since light is emitted from the back side of the game board, various types of information can be displayed without reducing the visibility of the movement of the game ball.
It is possible to display in accordance with the operation of an accessory or a decorative lamp.
(A3)
(Placement target) Affixed to the front and back surfaces of various decorative cover members (placement locations) decorative cover members.
What is necessary is just to select whether it is a surface or a back surface according to solid shapes, such as an unevenness | corrugation of a decorative cover member.
Moreover, you may affix on both the front surface and a back surface in a superimposed manner.
The transparent effect display film has flexibility, and even if the surface of the decorative cover member is curved, it can be stuck and adhered along the surface.
(Contents) Conventionally, the color that can be expressed by the color of the decorative cover member itself and the light emission color of the lamp arranged inside is determined. The color can be changed according to the timing of the progress of the game. Furthermore, light emission modes such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, emission color, emission intensity, and emission portion (pattern or figure) can be arbitrarily determined.
(A4)
(Placement target) A transparent effect display film can be arranged so as to cover the front face of the protective cover member (placement location) effect display device of the center decoration unit. The entire effect display device may be covered or only a part may be covered.
A transparent effect display film may be disposed on a decorative member disposed around the effect display device. Similar to the decorative cover member, the front or back surface may be selected according to the three-dimensional shape such as the unevenness of the decorative member. Moreover, you may affix on both the front surface and a back surface in a superimposed manner. The transparent effect display film has flexibility, and even if the surface of the decorative cover member is curved, it can be stuck and adhered along the surface.
(Content) A superimposed image can be displayed so as to cover an image such as a symbol or a character displayed on the effect display device, and an effect display can be auxiliary.
For example, it is possible to display a tempering line indicating that the tempering has been performed, a hold display and a change display, a V display during button striking effects, and the like.
Note that the transmissive effect display film may be disposed only in a part of the area such as the periphery of the effect display device so that the player can clearly see the type and movement of the symbols displayed on the effect display device.
(A5)
(Arrangement target) Various kinds of accessory (placement location) The transparency effect display film may be arranged on the front side or inside of the accessory.
Depending on the shape, size, and movement of the accessory, it may be determined appropriately whether it is the front side or the inside.
Similarly to the decorative cover member, the front side or the inner side may be selected and arranged according to the three-dimensional shape such as the unevenness of the accessory. Moreover, you may affix on both front side and inner side in a superimposed manner. The transmission effect display film has flexibility, and even if the surface of the accessory has a curved shape, it can be adhered and adhered along the surface.
(Content) Conventionally, the color that can be expressed by the color of the member itself constituting the accessory has been determined as in the case of the decorative cover member. Can be changed according to the timing of the progress of the game, the position of the accessory, and the like. Furthermore, light emission modes such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, emission color, emission intensity, and emission portion (pattern or figure) can be arbitrarily determined.
(A6)
(Placement target) When a mechanical reel unit is used as an alternative to the effect display device, a protective cover (placement location) for protecting the reel unit may be attached to the front surface or the back surface of the protective cover. It may be affixed to the entire surface or a part of it.
What is necessary is just to determine the position and magnitude | size to stick according to the arrangement | positioning state of a reel, a shape, and a magnitude | size. Furthermore, what is necessary is just to determine the position and magnitude | size which affix the transparency production display film according to the position where a symbol stops.
(Contents) A superimposed image can be displayed so as to cover the symbol displayed on the reel unit, and an effect display can be auxiliary.
For example, a tempering line indicating that the tempering has been performed can be displayed.
The transparent effect display film may be disposed only in a part of the area such as the periphery of the reel unit so that the player can clearly see the type and movement of the symbols displayed on the reel unit.
(A7)
(Placement target) An alternative (placement location) effect display device instead of an effect display device is arranged instead of a transparency effect display film.
(Content) The same effect as the effect display device can be maintained. The display portion can be made thin, and a space in which another control device or the like can be installed on the back side (inside) can be secured.

Next, FIG. 96 is a list of (B) electromagnetic wave shielding devices and (C) devices that need to shield electromagnetic waves related to pachinko machines. The following lists the target (target device), contents, and remarks.
(B1)
(Target) Conductive case (Content) Case for storing and protecting main control board, sub control board, payout control board, etc. (Remarks) Displaying information such as characters and figures for instructing the player To do.
A display that covers a part of the front of the effect display device, the accessory, and the decorative member can be performed without being hindered by the effect display device, the accessory, and the decorative member.
By displaying a superimposed image while covering the image to be displayed on the effect display device, an effect display can be performed supplementarily.
For example, it is possible to display a tempering line indicating that the tempering has been performed, a hold display and a change display, a V display at the time of a button hit effect, and the like.
In addition, it is preferable to arrange a transmissive effect display film and display various types of information so that the player can clearly see the type and movement of the symbols displayed on the effect display device.
On the other hand, a transmissive effect display film may be arranged so as to display various types of information superimposed on the types and movements of symbols displayed on the effect display device.
Similarly, a transmissive effect display film may be arranged so that various types of information are displayed by being superimposed or synchronized in accordance with the action of an accessory.
(B2)
(Subject) Conductor plate (Contents) In addition to the main control board, sub-control board, payout control board, etc., it is placed around and around electrical members such as production display devices and solenoids to cover some of these devices Plate (Remarks) In the same way as the conductive case, in addition to the case where the plate is formed of a conductive material, such as a metal, a non-conductive material by forming a conductive film or conductive material described later. For example, the case where a plate is formed by imparting conductivity to a resin such as plastic or acrylic is included.
In particular, in the case of a plate that requires translucency (transparency), a conductive film and a conductive material that also have translucency are formed on a transparent resin case to form the conductivity and transparency. A case having both optical properties can be formed.
For example, there is a metal oxide or the like as a conductive material to be formed.
(B3)
(Target) Conductive film (contents) Conductive film for constructing the above conductive case and conductive plate, and by attaching the conductive film to the surface of the case or plate that is not conductive by itself The conductive case and conductive plate are formed by imparting conductivity.
(Remarks) In addition to the case where the conductive film is a film having conductivity by itself, the base material is a non-conductive material, for example, a resin film such as plastic or acrylic, by forming a conductive material described later. In this case, a conductive film is formed by imparting conductivity.
The step of depositing the conductive material on the film substrate may be selected as appropriate from coating, vapor deposition, sputtering, and the like.
Furthermore, when translucency (transparency) is required, a conductive film having translucency can be formed by forming a conductive material from a transparent film as a base material. .
(B4)
(Target) Thin film formation (film formation) with conductive materials
(Content) Conductivity is imparted by depositing a conductive material on the surface of a member made of resin or the like having no conductivity.
(Remarks) Overlapping images can be displayed so as to cover images such as symbols and characters displayed on the effect display device, and auxiliary effect display can be performed.
For example, it is possible to display a tempering line indicating that the tempering has been performed, a hold display and a change display, a V display at the time of a button hit effect, and the like.
Note that the transmissive effect display film may be disposed only in a part of the area such as the periphery of the effect display device so that the player can clearly see the type and movement of the symbols displayed on the effect display device.
(B5)
(Object) Electromagnetic wave attenuation structure (contents) A structure for attenuating electromagnetic waves without using the conductivity of the conductive material. For example, the main control board is separated from the electromagnetic wave source by a predetermined distance. In addition, there are structures for arranging electrical components such as a sub-control board and a payout control board.
(Remarks) Although it can be constructed at low cost without using a conductive material, it is necessary to secure a sufficient distance for attenuation. The distance needs to be determined according to the intensity of the electromagnetic wave.
(C1)
(Target device) Main control board (contents) A board for determining the progress of a game, and a board on which various basic processes are executed.
(Remarks) Even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device, it is necessary to properly execute various processes without causing the main control board to malfunction due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves. is there.
(C2)
(Target device) Sub-control board (contents) This is a board for mainly controlling the production, and the production is determined based on various information relating to the game transmitted from the main control board.
(Remarks) The production content is a valuable information source for the player to infer or judge the game state. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device, it is necessary that the original effects be executed without causing the sub-control board to malfunction due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves.
(C3)
(Target device) Prize ball payout control board (contents) This is a board for controlling the payout of game balls to the player.
(Remarks) Whether or not game balls are paid out, the number of game balls to be paid out, etc., must be handled accurately and fairly. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device, it is necessary to perform the original operation accurately without causing the prize ball payout control board to malfunction due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves. Yes (C4)
(Target device) Relay board (contents) A board for electrically connecting a plurality of control boards such as the main control board M and the sub-control board S and other electrical members.
(Remarks) The relay board needs to appropriately transmit a control signal generated from one control board to another control board or an electric member. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device, it is necessary to accurately transmit the original control signal without the control signal being modulated by the influence of the electromagnetic wave.
(C5)
(Target device) Equipment drive device (solenoid, etc.)
(Contents) A device for driving an accessory, such as a solenoid or a motor. The accessory is driven by the accessory driving device, and performs various operations such as movement and rotation that are visible to the player. Further, it is necessary to accurately detect a sensor for detecting the operation of the accessory and output a detection signal.
(Remarks) The accessory is an important member that can change the game state by the player, and the operation of the accessory needs to be a reproducible and constant operation according to the control signal. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device, the control signal is not modulated by the influence of the electromagnetic waves, or the accessory driving device or the sensor does not malfunction. It is necessary to perform an original operation or output an original detection signal.
(C6)
(Target device) Effect display device (content) Effect display device displays various effect images. The effect content by the effect image is valuable information for the player to infer or judge the game state.
(Remarks) It is necessary to make the contents of the performance accurately visible without disturbing the image or causing color modulation. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, it is necessary to display the original effect image without disturbing the image due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves or malfunctioning the effect display device SG. There is.
(C7)
(Target device) Various cables (contents) In addition to cables for connecting control boards, cables for connecting various electrical components are covered with a conductive member.
(Remarks) Cables need to properly transmit various control signals. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device TSG, the original control signals and detection signals are accurately transmitted without the control signals and detection signals being modulated by the influence of the electromagnetic waves. There is a need.

Next, FIG. 97 is a list of installation parts of (A) the transmissive effect display device TSG related to the spinning cylinder type game machine. Hereinafter, the arrangement target, the arrangement location, and the contents are listed.
(A1)
(Disposition object) Middle panel (arrangement place) A reel window (opening) is formed at the center of the middle panel. The three reels are arranged so that the player can visually recognize the symbol through the reel window.
The transmission effect display film is disposed on both the front side surface and the back side surface of the middle panel. (The middle panel is provided with the front side facing the player and the back side facing the three reels.)
(Contents) Information such as characters and figures for instructing the player is displayed.
A display that covers a part of the front of the effect display device, the accessory, and the decorative member can be performed without being hindered by the effect display device, the accessory, and the decorative member.
By displaying a superimposed image while covering the image to be displayed on the effect display device, an effect display can be performed supplementarily.
For example, it is possible to display a tempering line indicating that the tempering has been performed, a hold display and a change display, a V display at the time of a button hit effect, and the like.
In addition, it is preferable to arrange a transmissive effect display film and display various types of information so that the player can clearly see the type and movement of the symbols displayed on the effect display device.
On the other hand, a transmissive effect display film may be arranged so as to display various types of information superimposed on the types and movements of symbols displayed on the effect display device.
Similarly, a transmissive effect display film may be arranged so that various types of information are displayed by being superimposed or synchronized in accordance with the action of an accessory.
(A2)
(Placement target) Upper panel (placement location) A transparent effect display film is placed (attached) on the back surface of the upper panel. The transmissive effect display film may be disposed on the entire back surface of the upper panel or may be disposed on only a part thereof. What is necessary is just to determine the position and magnitude | size which arrange | position a transparent production | presentation display film according to the position, the shape, and magnitude | size of various members, such as an effect display apparatus arrange | positioned on an upper panel, and an accessory.
(Contents) Conventionally, a light source such as a lamp for illuminating the upper panel has been arranged. However, by arranging a transmissive effect display film on the upper panel, there is no need to use a light source, and a light source is arranged. The other space can be provided with other objects and devices, and the space behind the upper panel can be used effectively. For example, a heavy bass speaker, a woofer, or the like can be arranged in the space behind the upper panel.
(A3)
(Placement target) Lower panel (placement location) A transparent effect display film is placed (attached) on the back side of the lower panel. The transmissive effect display film may be disposed on the entire back surface of the lower panel or may be disposed on only a part thereof. What is necessary is just to determine the position and magnitude | size which arrange | position a transparent effect display film according to the position, shape, and magnitude | size of various members, such as an accessory arrange | positioned at a lower panel.
(Content) Conventionally, a light source such as a lamp for illuminating the lower panel has been arranged. However, by arranging a transparent effect display film on the lower panel, it is not necessary to use a light source, and a light source is arranged. Various other devices can be installed in the space, and the space behind the lower panel can be used effectively. For example, a heavy bass speaker, a woofer, or the like can be arranged in the space behind the lower panel.
(A4)
(Arrangement target) Various display devices such as substitution (placement location) input number display lamp, operation state display light, special game state display device, payout number display device (push order display device), credit number display device, etc. By using a transmission effect display film instead of the device, it is possible to display these information without using a plurality of display devices.
(Content) A superimposed image can be displayed so as to cover an image such as a symbol or a character displayed on the effect display device, and an effect display can be performed supplementarily.
For example, it is possible to display a tempering line indicating that the tempering has been performed, a hold display and a change display, a V display at the time of a button hit effect, and the like.
Note that the transmissive effect display film may be disposed only in a part of the area such as the periphery of the effect display device so that the player can clearly see the type and movement of the symbols displayed on the effect display device.
(A5)
(Placement target) A console portion (placement location) A transparent effect display film is placed on the back side of the operation panel provided with a sub input button, a bet button, and a medal slot. The transmissive effect display film may be disposed on the entire back surface of the operation panel or a part thereof. It is preferable to arrange the sub input button, the bet button, and the medal slot in a position and shape that do not interfere with each other.
(Content) Various operations can be facilitated by displaying information indicating that the sub input button, the bet button, and the medal slot are in an operable state on the transparent effect display film.
Help information related to operations may be displayed. In addition, information on errors that have occurred regarding operations may be displayed.
(A6)
(Arrangement target) An accessory and a cover member (arrangement place) before the accessory include, for example, a figure. A transparent effect display film is placed on the surface of the figure itself or a protective cover that protects the figure.
What is necessary is just to select the surface of a front side or a surface of a back side according to solid shapes, such as an unevenness | corrugation of an accessory. Moreover, you may affix on both the front side surface and the back side surface in a superimposed manner. The transmission effect display film has flexibility and can be applied along the surface even when the surface of the accessory has a curved shape.
In addition, a transparent effect display film can be disposed on the back surface of the protective cover for protecting the accessory. You may arrange | position to the whole surface of the back side of a protective cover, or only one part. What is necessary is just to determine the position and magnitude | size which arrange | position a transparent production display film according to the arrangement | positioning state, shape, and magnitude | size of an effect display apparatus or an accessory.
(Content) Conventionally, the color that can be expressed by the color of the member itself constituting the accessory has been determined, but by using a transparent effect display film, it can emit light in multiple colors, and the emission color can be used in the progress of the game or the accessory. It can be changed according to the timing of the position. Furthermore, light emission modes such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, emission color, emission intensity, and emission portion (pattern or figure) can be arbitrarily determined.
By displaying various kinds of information on the transmissive effect display film of the protective cover by superimposing or synchronizing in accordance with the operation of the accessory, it is possible to form various light emission states and enhance the effect.
(A7)
(Placement target) A cover member (placement location) of a lamp such as a side lamp is placed on the front and back surfaces of the cover member. What is necessary is just to select whether it is a surface or a back surface according to three-dimensional shapes, such as an unevenness | corrugation of a cover member. Moreover, you may affix on both the front surface and a back surface in a superimposed manner.
The transparent effect display film has flexibility and can be applied along the surface even when the surface of the cover member has a curved shape.
(Contents) A lamp substrate or the like is not required, and a space for installing a figure, an accessory, etc. can be secured on the back side (inside) of the lamp cover and inner lens.
(A8)
(Placement target) An alternative (placement location) effect display device instead of an effect display device is arranged instead of a transparency effect display film.
(Content) The same effect as the effect display device can be maintained. The display portion can be made thin, and a space in which another control device or the like can be installed on the back side (inside) can be secured.
(A9)
(Placement target) Overlapping or replacing the reel (placement location) The transmissive effect display device is flexible, and the transmissive effect display device is curved along the reel and placed on the front or back side of the reel. can do.
(Content) It is possible to superimpose and display effects (for example, a notice like a meteor shower with a reduced back lamp) during the reel start wait period and the operation invalid period before the constant speed.

Next, FIG. 98 is a list of (B) an electromagnetic wave shielding device and (C) a device that needs to shield electromagnetic waves, according to a spinning cylinder type game machine. The following lists the target (target device), contents, and remarks.
(B1)
(Target) Conductive case (Contents) Case for storing and protecting the main control board, sub control board, medal payout device, etc. (Remarks) Displaying information such as characters and figures for instructing the player To do.
A display that covers a part of the front of the effect display device, the accessory, and the decorative member can be performed without being hindered by the effect display device, the accessory, and the decorative member.
By displaying a superimposed image while covering the image to be displayed on the effect display device, an effect display can be performed supplementarily.
For example, it is possible to display a tempering line indicating that the tempering has been performed, a hold display and a change display, a V display at the time of a button hit effect, and the like.
In addition, it is preferable to arrange a transmissive effect display film and display various types of information so that the player can clearly see the type and movement of the symbols displayed on the effect display device.
On the other hand, a transmissive effect display film may be arranged so as to display various types of information superimposed on the types and movements of symbols displayed on the effect display device.
Similarly, a transmissive effect display film may be arranged so that various types of information are displayed by being superimposed or synchronized in accordance with the action of an accessory.
(B2)
(Target) Conductor plate (Contents) In addition to the main control board, sub-control board, medal payout device, etc., it is placed around and around electrical members such as effect display devices and solenoids to cover a part of these devices Plate (Remarks) In the same way as the conductive case, in addition to the case where the plate is formed of a conductive material, such as a metal, a non-conductive material by forming a conductive film or conductive material described later. For example, the case where a plate is formed by imparting conductivity to a resin such as plastic or acrylic is included.
In particular, in the case of a plate that requires translucency (transparency), a conductive film or a conductive material that also has translucency is formed on a transparent resin plate to form the conductivity and transparency. A plate having both optical properties can be formed.
(B3)
(Target) Conductive film (contents) Conductive film for constructing the above conductive case and conductive plate, and by attaching the conductive film to the surface of the case or plate that is not conductive by itself The conductive case and conductive plate are formed by imparting conductivity.
(Remarks) In addition to the case where the conductive film is a film having conductivity by itself, the base material is a non-conductive material, for example, a resin film such as plastic or acrylic, by forming a conductive material described later. In this case, a conductive film is formed by imparting conductivity.
The step of depositing the conductive material on the film substrate may be appropriately selected from a liquid phase film formation method (coating, plating, etc.) and a gas phase film formation method (physical vapor deposition method, chemical vapor deposition method, etc.). .
Furthermore, when translucency (transparency) is required, a conductive film having translucency can be formed by forming a conductive material from a transparent film as a base material. .
(B4)
(Target) Thin film formation (film formation) with conductive materials
(Content) Conductivity is imparted by depositing a conductive material on the surface of a member made of resin or the like having no conductivity.
(Remarks) Overlapping images can be displayed so as to cover images such as symbols and characters displayed on the effect display device, and auxiliary effect display can be performed.
For example, it is possible to display a tempering line indicating that the tempering has been performed, a hold display and a change display, a V display during button striking effects, and the like.
Note that the transmissive effect display film may be disposed only in a part of the area such as the periphery of the effect display device so that the player can clearly see the type and movement of the symbols displayed on the effect display device.
(B5)
(Target) Electromagnetic wave suppression mechanism (contents) A mechanism or structure for suppressing arrival by attenuating electromagnetic waves without using the conductivity of conductive materials. For example, a predetermined distance from an electromagnetic wave source And a mechanism for arranging electrical components such as a main control board, a sub-control board, and a medal payout device.
(Remarks) Although it can be constructed at low cost without using a conductive material, it is necessary to secure and suppress a sufficient distance for attenuation. The distance needs to be determined according to the intensity of the electromagnetic wave.
(C1)
(Target device) Main control board (contents) A board for determining the progress of a game, and a board on which various basic processes are executed.
(Remarks) Even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device, it is necessary to properly execute various processes without causing the main control board to malfunction due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves. is there.
(C2)
(Target device) Sub-control board (contents) This is a board for mainly controlling the production, and the production is determined based on various information relating to the game transmitted from the main control board.
(Remarks) The production content is a valuable information source for the player to infer or judge the game state. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device, it is necessary that the original effects be executed without causing the sub-control board to malfunction due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves.
(C3)
(Target device) Medal payout device (contents) A board for controlling payout of medals to a player.
(Remarks) Acceptance / rejection of medals and the number of medals to be paid out must be handled accurately and fairly. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device, it is necessary that the original operation is accurately executed without causing the medal payout device to malfunction due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves.
(C4)
(Target device) Hopper (contents) medals are stored, and a motor provided in the hopper is driven to pay out a predetermined number of medals from the hopper.
(Remarks) The hopper motor needs to operate accurately according to the drive signal. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device, it is necessary that the original operation is accurately executed without causing the hopper motor to malfunction due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves.
(C5)
(Target device) Medal insertion sensor (Contents) Medals inserted from the medal insertion slot are counted by the medal insertion sensor.
(Remarks) The number of games that can be played depends on the number of medals inserted, so it must be strictly managed. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device, it is necessary to accurately operate the medals without being erroneously counted due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves.
(C6)
(Target device) Medal payout sensor (Content) The medals paid out from the medal payout exit are counted by the medal payout sensor.
(Remarks) Since the medals to be paid out are lent to the player, the number of medals to be paid out must be strictly managed. For this reason, even when electromagnetic waves are emitted from the transmission effect display device, it is necessary to accurately operate the medals without being erroneously counted due to the influence of the electromagnetic waves.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (higher level conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (1)
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a transmission effect display device TSG);
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls information display on the information display unit (for example, the transmission effect display device TSG),
The information display unit (for example, the transmission effect display device TSG) includes a first conductive layer (for example, the first conductive layer 1120) and the first conductive layer (for example, the first conductive layer 1120). A second conductive layer (for example, the second conductive layer 2120) disposed opposite to the first conductive layer (for example, the first conductive layer 1120) and the second conductive layer (for example, the first conductive layer) Second conductive layer 2120) and the first electrode (eg, first electrode 1012) in electrical contact with the first conductive layer (eg, first conductive layer 1120) and the second conductive layer 2120) A light emitting element having a second electrode (eg, second electrode 1014) in electrical contact with a conductive layer (eg, second conductive layer 2120);
At least a part of the information display unit (for example, the transmission effect display device TSG) has flexibility,
At least a part of the information display unit (for example, the transmission effect display device TSG) has translucency,
The information display unit (for example, the transmission effect display device TSG) is formed in a sheet shape,
Suppression of suppressing arrival of electromagnetic waves emitted from the information display unit (for example, the transmission effect display device TSG) to the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) or the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) Mechanism (for example, electromagnetic wave suppressing member DY)
It is comprised so that it may further be provided.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (2)
A lower panel (for example, lower panel D140) disposed at a lower portion of the front surface of the housing;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An information display unit (for example, a transmissive effect display device TSG) provided on the lower panel (for example, the lower panel D140) capable of displaying information;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls information display on the information display unit (for example, the transmission effect display device TSG),
The information display unit (for example, the transmissive effect display device TSG) includes a first conductive layer (for example, the first conductive layer 1120) having translucency at least in part, and the first conductive layer (for example, , A second conductive layer (for example, the second conductive layer 2120) that is disposed so as to face the first conductive layer 1120 and has at least a part of the light-transmitting property, and the first conductive layer (for example, the first conductive layer 1120). The first conductive layer 1120) and the second conductive layer (for example, the second conductive layer 2120) are sandwiched between the first conductive layer (for example, the first conductive layer 1120) and electrically contact the first conductive layer 1120). Light emission having a second electrode (for example, the second electrode 1014) in electrical contact with the second electrode (for example, the second electrode 1014) and the second conductive layer (for example, the second conductive layer 2120). Characterized by having an element It is a technique machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (3)
A game area in which game balls can flow down (for example, game area D30);
A gaming board (eg, gaming board D35) that defines the gaming area (eg, gaming area D30) and has transparency;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a transmission effect display device TSG);
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls information display on the information display unit (for example, the transmission effect display device TSG),
The information display unit (for example, the transmissive effect display device TSG) includes a first conductive layer (for example, the first conductive layer 1120) having translucency at least in part, and the first conductive layer (for example, , A second conductive layer (for example, the second conductive layer 2120) that is disposed so as to face the first conductive layer 1120 and has at least a part of the light-transmitting property, and the first conductive layer (for example, the first conductive layer 1120). The first conductive layer 1120) and the second conductive layer (for example, the second conductive layer 2120) are sandwiched between the first conductive layer (for example, the first conductive layer 1120) and electrically contact the first conductive layer 1120). Light emission having a second electrode (for example, the second electrode 1014) in electrical contact with the second electrode (for example, the second electrode 1014) and the second conductive layer (for example, the second conductive layer 2120). Characterized by having an element It is a technique machine.

1000 light emitting member, 100 light emitting region 1010 first light emitting element, 1020 second light emitting element, 1030 third light emitting element 1200 first intermediate layer, 1300 second intermediate layer 1100 first support, 2100 second Support, 3100 third support 1110 first substrate, 2110 second substrate, 3110 third substrate 1120 first conductive layer, 2120 second conductive layer, 2130 third conductive layer 3120 fourth Conductive layer 1012 (1022, 1032) first electrode, 1014 (1024, 1034) second electrode 1017 (1027) side portion 1016 (1026, 1036) first end face 1018 (1028, 1038) second End surface 1122A (1122B, 1122C) End of circuit pattern, 1132A (1132B, 1132C) End 1 of circuit pattern 34A (1134B, 1134C) circuit pattern end DY electromagnetism suppressing member M main control board,
MN11ta-A 1st main game success lottery table, MN11ta-B 2nd main game success lottery table MN11ta-H Auxiliary game success lottery table, MN41ta-A 1st main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B 2nd Main game symbol determination lottery table, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN51ta-A First main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51ta-B Second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H Auxiliary game Fluctuation mode determination lottery table, MP11t-C first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP22t-B second main game start opening electric player release timer MP32ta special game Contents reference table, MP33c winning ball counter MP34t special play Timer, MP52c time reduction counter MT10 command transmission buffer A first main game peripheral device, A10 first main game start port A11s first main game start port entrance detection device, A20 first main game symbol display device A21g first Main game symbol display unit, A21h First main game symbol hold display unit B Second main game peripheral device, B10 Second main game start port B11s Second main game start port entrance detection device, B11d Second main game start port electric Item B20 Second main game symbol display device, B21g Second main game symbol display unit B21h Second main game symbol hold display unit C First / second main game shared peripheral device, C10 First big prize opening C11s First big Winning award winning detection device, C11d 1st big winning opening electric accessory C20 2nd big winning entrance, C21s 2nd big winning opening prize detecting device C21d 2nd big winning opening electric accessory, D30 game area HH Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start port H11s Auxiliary game start port entrance detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S Sub control board, SM effect display control Means (Sub-main control board)
SM21ta drawing variation content determination lottery table, SM21t drawing variation time management timer SM25ta production content determination table, SG production display device SG10 display area, SG11 decorative symbol display area SG12 first hold display section, SG13 second hold display section TSG Transparent display device, TSG10 Transparent display region TSG11 Transparent decorative symbol display region, TSG12 Transparent first hold display portion TSG13 Transparent second hold display portion SB Sub input button, SBs Sub input button input detection device KH Prize ball Dispensing control board, KE prize ball dispensing apparatus, KE10 dispensing unit D16 transparent plate, YK movable object, KT prize ball tank, KR prize ball rail KH prize ball dispensing control board, Ea power switch DD42 launching device, EE power supply unit , DD40 launch control board D38 Center decoration 26 game effect lamp, DM drum D35 game board, DC decorative cover member, figure case FC
P Cylinder type game machine, DU front door (door)
D Door board, D10s Input acceptance sensor D20s First input sensor, D30s Second input sensor D40 Stop button, D41 Left stop button D42 Middle stop button, D43 Right stop button D50 Start lever, D60 Checkout button D70 Display panel, D80 Door switch D90 coin shooter, D100 blocker D130 upper panel, D140 lower panel, D110 middle panel D150 decoration lamp unit, D160 reel window D170 medal slot, D180 operation status indicator, D190 console D200 credit number indicator, D210 insertion number indicator D220 Bet button, D230 Medal tray D240 Release port, D250 Special game state display device D260 Keyhole, D270 Discharge number display device (push order display device)
D280 AT counter value display device M main control board, M10 setting door switch M20 setting key switch, M30 setting / reset button C main control chip, SC sub control chip, M50 reel M51 left reel, M52 middle reel M53 right reel, M60 AT Counter M70 Game interval minimum timer S Sub control board, S10 Decoration lamp (LED lamp)
S20 Speaker, S30 Revolving backlight SG Production display device, SC Sub-control chip TSG Transparency production display device E Power supply board, E10 Power switch H Medal payout device, H10s First payout sensor H20s Second payout sensor, H40 Hopper H50 Disc , H50a disc rotation shaft H60 game medal outlet, H70 discharge urging means H80 hopper motor K rotor board, K10 rotor motor K20 rotor sensor, IN relay board

Claims (1)

A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
An information display section capable of displaying information;
A secondary game unit that controls information display on the information display unit,
The information display unit
The first conductive layer sandwiched between the first conductive layer, the second conductive layer disposed to face the first conductive layer, and the first conductive layer and the second conductive layer. A first light emitting element having a first electrode in electrical contact with the second conductive layer and a second electrode in electrical contact with the second conductive layer ;
A third conductive layer disposed on the opposite side of the substrate on which the second conductive layer is disposed; a fourth conductive layer disposed opposite to the third conductive layer; and the third conductive layer A second electrode having a third electrode sandwiched between the layer and the fourth conductive layer and in electrical contact with the third conductive layer; and a fourth electrode in electrical contact with the fourth conductive layer Having at least a light emitting element ,
At least a part of the information display part has flexibility,
At least a part of the information display part has translucency,
The information display part is formed in a sheet shape,
A gaming machine, further comprising a suppression mechanism that suppresses arrival of electromagnetic waves emitted from the information display unit to a main game unit or a sub game unit.

Images